Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides.rte. drawing sheets. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the door retains this relationship to the partition. schedules. the floor or roof remains connected. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and open Metric\Templates. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. the operation of the software is parametric. and click Open. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In this case. how to navigate the user interface. and customize the project as necessary. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. 13 Click OK. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . quantities. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. click Training Files. review the Revit Architecture templates. scope. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and plans. the parameter is one of association or connection. construction. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. For most tutorial projects. drawings. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. 2D and 3D view. and schedules required for a building project. If the length of the elevation is changed. sections. As you work in drawing and schedule views. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You learn the terminology. In this case. you will use the default template. In the Revit Architecture model. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. hence. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. If you move the partition. 12 Select DefaultMetric. every drawing sheet. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the hierarchy of elements.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. and residential. and phases when you need it.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. programming is not required. dimensions. tags. dimensions. They display in relevant views of the model. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. walls and roofs are hosts. grids. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements.When you change something. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. If you can draw. For example. For example. and 2D detail components. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. doors. Examples include detail lines. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. levels. They help to describe or document the model. walls. and reference planes are datum elements. and cabinets are model components. For example. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Datum elements help to define project context. windows. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. tags. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. windows. filled regions. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. doors. and roofs are model elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. For example. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 .

and types. and ceilings. and drawings of the design. Project: In Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. from geometry to construction data. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. By using a single project file. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. However. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. views of the project. first floor. Often. you must be in a section or elevation view. or bottom of foundation. floors. elevation views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. To place levels. such as roofs. you can explicitly control them. you do nothing to establish these relationships. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Most often. for example. The project file contains all information for the building design. top of wall. In other cases. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. section views. families. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . schedules. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. and so forth). the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. for example. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components.In Revit Architecture.

although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. However. ceilings. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. identical use. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can also be a style. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. floors. roofs. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. making it easy to understand what each button represents. In the steps that follow. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ Type: Each family can have several types. For example. dimensions. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. For example. System families include walls. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. System families can be transferred between projects. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. and levels. the user interface is labeled. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. specifically its clear user interface. and similar graphical representation. categories of model elements include walls and beams. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). In the following illustration. A type can be a specific size of a family. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions.

The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. click (New). This creates a new project based on the default template. In addition. By default. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.

which are listed on the menu. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. you type the required key combination to perform the command. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. and View. For example. Edit. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. While working in the drawing area. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. For example. On the left side of the Options Bar. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. 9 In the Type Selector.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. a door type is specified. When you select the Door tool. when you add a door.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. In the drawing area. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. immediately below the Type Selector.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. select Views (all). 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click the tab in the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab.11 Click OK. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.

and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. walls. 3D). Navigating the User Interface | 15 . elevations. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. schedules. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. The browser is dockable. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. and group name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. reports. windows). and groups. and rename views. double-click its name. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. families. To open a view. families. sheets. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. family category (doors. delete.

The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Cancel.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . After creating a browser organization scheme. click Wall. Do not click. In the bottom left corner of the window. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. In this case. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. The cursor displays as a pencil.

If no Help button displays. 20 Press TAB. press F1 for context-sensitive help. There are several tools that help you find information.18 On the Design Bar. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. click Modify to end the Wall command. It highlights when the cursor is over it. press F1 for help. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. In the status bar. find a keyword on the Index tab. In addition. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. You can use this tri-pane. Click the Help button. Toolbar: From the toolbar. Tooltips: To see tooltips. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. After you are familiar with these tasks. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. The status bar also provides information. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. regarding selected elements in a view. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. in conjunction with tooltips. click on the Standard toolbar. When you place the cursor over an element. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Windows: From any window. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu.

18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 5 On the View toolbar. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Training Files. For example. There are several ways to access zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. In the following steps. In the drawing area. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. the view zooms out from the building model. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.rvt.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x).

on the View toolbar. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 10 To display SteeringWheels. . you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click in the drawing area. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. To modify or add snap increments. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. the view zooms in on the selected area. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Click and hold the mouse button.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. As you move the mouse. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. When you release the mouse button.

When drawing or modifying a building model. Small blue dots. expand Views (all). 15 To exit the wheel. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. 17 Type ZR. For more information about SteeringWheels. bottoms. Cnst. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. and double-click 2nd Flr. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. as shown. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. and click the SteeringWheels tab. referred to as shape handles.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. click Settings menu ➤ Options. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and select the wall. and click Help. These are the drag controls. and then using the Zoom tool again. called drag controls. expand Floor Plans. press ESC. moving the wheel to the desired location. display along the ends. To define settings for SteeringWheels.

22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. After selecting the element to move. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. to lengthen the wall. as shown.18 Click and drag the left control. you want to move the table closer to the wall. require 2 clicks to complete the command. for example. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. The table moves down. Some commands. click (Move). In this case. 23 Click next to the lower wall. such as Move and Copy. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position. and on the Tools toolbar.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. and drag it on top of the table. click Lines. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. and click again to end it. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 Select the plant. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. In this example. Move. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 26 On the Undo menu. select the second item in the list. Some commands. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. or press CTRL+Z. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo).

click Modify. On the Design Bar. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 .29 To end the command. Press ESC twice. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Use keynotes to annotate a detail. but for training purposes. In this tutorial. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. In Revit Architecture. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. When you have finished these tutorials.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. detail. 27 . this tutorial uses imperial units only. Use detail components to define an assembly. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. and annotate building assemblies. illustrating how building components work together. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. or referenced as a drafting view. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions.

you will create a drafting view. If necessary. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. enter Window Head Detail. for Name. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. click Drafting View. and reference a drafting view. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. scroll until the folder is displayed. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. create a reference callout.rvt. 3 In the Scale list. import a DWG detail.

as shown. 9 Type ZR. The drawing area is still blank. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 10 In the drawing area. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. displaying the extents of the detail. expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.dwg. The model zooms out. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . and click Open. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.).In the Project Browser. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. click Training Files. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. located directly to the left of the drawing area. select Black and White. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 6 In the Colors field list.

13 Click Reference other view. 14 In the drawing area. to activate the view selection list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .The view displays to the specified area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. in the Type Selector. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. click Callout. select Detail View: Detail. and in the Scale list.

rvt. adjust the detail view display settings. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. 3 In the drawing area. and in the Scale list. select Callout. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. double-click the reference callout tag head. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. c_express_workshop_details_start. 2 On the Options Bar.The reference callout is created.

and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 6 In the drawing area. enter Wall Base 1. for Name. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. 4 Right-click Detail 0. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . under Detail Views(Detail). Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Wall Base 1. under Detail Views (Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. click Modify to clear the selection.

The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. This is the view crop region. bordered by a solid line. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 .

The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. under Graphics. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select As Underlay. click (Hide Crop Region). The model elements in the view display as half-tones. and click View Properties. 16 Click OK. right-click. for Display Model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 14 In the drawing area.

the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By grouping detail components. 17 On the View Control Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. typical details can easily be placed. 20 In the drawing area. 19 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . Model-Based Detailing | 35 . If the crop region is enlarged. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium.Brick on Mtl. Directly above the drawing area. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. click Detail Components. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. Stud. type 1' 6''. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model.

Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. 25 In the Project Browser. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Create Instance. expand Groups ➤ Detail.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 23 Using the same method. click Modify to end the command. add the following detail components as shown. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar.

28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail. ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .

you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.rvt. and Free End are selected. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Full Path. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. in the type selector. You can customize this list. click Training Files. and format keynote styles. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Leader. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. click Browse. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. For more information about customizing a keynote database. special notes. and verify that Horizontal. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. c_express_workshop_details_start. or instructions within a construction documentation package. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and under Keynote Table. click Keynote ➤ Element. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 4 On the Options Bar. In the next exercise.txt. map keynotes by material.

or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 7 Click to place the leader arm.5 In the drawing area. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . a question mark displays. If no value has been specified. 8 Click to place the tag. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. Either move the text inside. 9 Press ESC to end the command. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. Keynoting | 39 .

draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 16 In the drawing area. click Keynote ➤ Material. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 13 Click to place the tag. 15 Select 07 21 00. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. and click OK.

All items within the selection display in red. Click Check None. Select Keynote Tags. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. legends. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Creating Details with Revit Architecture.Boxed. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Click OK. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Only the keynotes remain selected.

Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. In this lesson. update the project information element properties. Add labels to a title block. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . In this exercise. but for training purposes.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Place views on drawing sheets.

In the Project Browser. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. 3 Click OK. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. scroll until the folder is displayed. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In Revit Architecture. click Training Files. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. or in the element properties of the title block. If necessary. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.rvt. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser.

drag the cursor to draw a rectangle.Unnamed. To zoom in and out. 9 In the Project Browser. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. and click Rename. double-click Checker. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. enter A602. Smith and press ENTER. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. hold down the wheel and drag. under Sheets(all). enter Sections/Details. roll the wheel. 5 In the drawing area. In this tutorial. Then. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . right-click A602 . click Modify to clear the selection. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. you can enter ZE to zoom out. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter K. 6 In the Title Block. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. For Name. Click OK.4 Type ZR. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. To pan.

16 Type ZR. enter J. 20 Click and type Project Status. enter Design Development. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Name. in the Type Selector. 15 In the Options Bar. Smith. click Text. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . select Text : 1/8''. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. The Family Editor opens. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. 13 Click OK. enter 4/10/2008. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. select the title block. For Client Name. (Left) is selected.

in the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. as shown. under Category Parameters. add Project Issue Date parameter. click Label. 23 On the Design Bar.21 On the Design Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 22 Using the same method. and click. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. click Modify to exit the command. select Label : 3/16''. click (Load into Project). to add 28 Using the same method. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. as shown. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and click OK. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and verify that (Top) are selected.

click Training Files. enter Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. to a drawing sheet. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. for Name. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. for Full Path. and under Keynote Table. you will create.30 In the Reload Family dialog. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . representing the view or schedule. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. In this exercise. Next you will create. click Browse. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. a viewport displays. and click Yes.Project.txt. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. place and modify a keynote legend. select Override parameter values of existing types. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.

6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. and drag Keynote Legend . 8 In the Project Browser. clear Show Headers. double-click A601 . on the Appearance tab. expand Legends.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Text. under Sheets (all). and click OK. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area.Sections/Details. as shown. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser.

13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. The keynote legend is visible. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 .9 Press ESC to clear the selection. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.Project as shown.

Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click Edit. not keynotes. and click Properties. expand Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and click OK. for Filter. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. select Filter by sheet.Sheet. at the bottom of the Filter tab. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser. enter Keynote Legend . NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. right-click Keynote Legend . as shown. for View Name. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. under Legends.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 19 Click OK twice. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser.Project. The Keynote Legend is now blank. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. double-click A0 .The keynote legend is automatically updated. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. The view title with line displays below the viewport. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. as shown. under Sheets (all). and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.Title Sheet 1. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. The view remains selected. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser.

52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. 6 Type ZR. The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. You can specify text attributes for view titles. The drawing list remains selected. define the information to include in a view title. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. expand Schedules/Quantities. as shown. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. or omit view titles from sheets. by default. 5 In the Project Browser. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. Press ESC to clear the selection. 3 In the Type Selector. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. As part of a construction document set. Revit Architecture displays a view title. and zoom in on the drawing list. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark.When you place a view on a sheet.

and click Properties. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. while pressing SHIFT. The drawing list display is updated. select A602 .Ceiling Plans.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . under Sheets (all). clear Appears In Drawing List. and click OK.Sections/Details and select A801 . under Identity Data. right-click the selected sheets. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Project Browser. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. including only sheets that contain views.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

or “flex the model” by changing parameters. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. As you develop the building design. it is good practice to test the constraints. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. a central service core. After the beginning exercises. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. the wall or column will move with it. If the grid moves. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. For example. a curtain wall.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. 57 .

In the drawing area in the right pane. West. South. and customize the project as necessary. notice four elevation markers. under Create new. levels. with an RVT extension. but contains no geometry. views. Creating the Project In this exercise. click Training Files. click New. such as a door or window. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you use a template that is provided with the software. you load any required family type that is not in your project. 5 Click OK. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. In practice. construction. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. from the product library.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and residential. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and settings. you design inside the elevation markers. 3 Under Template file. East. and click Browse. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. The project is stored as a single file. select Project. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. locate the Project Browser. In views that display elevation markers. or by opening the view in the Project Browser.rte. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. 2 In the New Project dialog. To create the project file. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. verify that the second option is selected. For this project. The new project opens. you will use the default template. under Projects. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen.

13 In the file window. enter Revit Retail Building.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. the view you see in the drawing area. 15 For Save as type. and click Training Files. Ceiling Plans. then expand Floor Plans. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. sheets. such as schedules and legends. Sheets (all). Click Settings menu ➤ Options. change their properties. Schedules/Quantities. duplicate them. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). and Elevations (Building Elevation). Groups. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. These views are customizable: you can rename them. double-click Metric. and elevation views created in the project by the template.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. created by the template. 14 For File name. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. verify that Project Files (*. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. and duplicate levels. delete. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. Families. 7 If necessary. schedules.rvt) is selected. content and building model reports. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. notice the Legends. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. NOTE If you create a project without a template. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. You can add. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. 16 Click Save. display in the south elevation. and delete them. and other properties. As you design and document your building model. you will want to save your work frequently. view the Save reminder interval. heights. double-click South. reflected ceiling plan views. Creating the Project | 59 . as well as change their names. 8 Under Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Two level lines. and on the General tab. and families in your project.

and windows within the building model. and press ENTER. to each other. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. Adding Project Levels on page 60. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. After you modify the two default levels. You change the names of the 2 default levels. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . doors. or constrained.17 Proceed to the next exercise. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. the other levels move and change with it. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. When you begin designing. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. expand Views (all). and double-click South. enter 00 Foundation. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. You learn how the levels are locked. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. so that when one level moves.

view the Design Bar. Adding Project Levels | 61 . which should display by default. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. By default. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. not all the tabs are visible. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 16 Enter 3750. enter 0.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. click Level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. right-click. If it does not. and press ENTER. 14 Click Plan View Types. and click Basics. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. When you add the new level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. and press ESC. 5 In the Project Browser. This is the Options Bar. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. As you move the cursor. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. Next. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and press ENTER. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. enter -1800. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. and then move it up. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar.

Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. enter 3750. Next. under Floor Plans. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. you add another level. click (Pick Lines). Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. or on the Design Bar. If you create a level by copying it. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. 25 Click to place the level line. and move it slightly upward. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 19 Click OK. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. using a different option. 26 Press ESC. 23 On the Options Bar. and enter 02 Level. and for Offset. right-click Level 3.18 In the Project Browser. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click Level. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Rename. click Modify to end the command. and rename the corresponding views.

Notice that by moving the top level. all the levels move. If you select a level and click its lock.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Adding Project Levels | 63 . 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. and you can move them independently. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. as shown. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. the levels are no longer constrained.

Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. Move the cursor up. 3 On the Options Bar. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. In a later exercise. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. On the Design Bar. click Modify. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. specify a start point for the grid line. In the following exercise. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. select (Draw). under Floor Plans. and specify the grid line endpoint. double-click 00 Foundation. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. When the grid is complete. the column height changes as well. click Grid. so that if the roof elevation changes. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

enter 4500 mm. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. Next. Click to place the grid line. and for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. and click to place the line. for Offset. On the Options Bar. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. for Offset. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. On the Options Bar. Enter A. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. click (Pick Lines). and click to place the line. enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. enter 7500 mm. click Grid. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . and press ENTER.

■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click Grid. as shown. click Grid.8 Press ESC. 11 On the Design Bar. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . On the Options Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.

Creating a Column Grid | 67 .Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. 18 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 21 Press ESC twice. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Starting with grid line A. click Dimension. 22 While pressing CTRL. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. select grid lines C and 3. click (Aligned).

5mm Bubble with Gap. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. and on the Options Bar. select grid line 5. 33 On the Design Bar. and press ESC.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. 26 In the drawing area. and select None. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. The pins are hidden. and press ESC. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 31 For End Segments Length. enter 50mm. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. and select grid line A. click Edit/New. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. By pinning these central grid lines. until it is closer to grid line 5. Two pins display on the grid lines. 24 Press ESC. and click OK. click . until it is closer to grid line A. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click Duplicate. 29 In the Name dialog. (Element Properties). building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click Modify. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click Modify. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. click the value for Center Segment. 32 Click OK twice. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. enter 6. If necessary.

40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. 35 In the Type Selector. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 39 In the Type Selector. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).5mm Bubble. 36 On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. and on the Options Bar. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click (Grid Intersection). and in the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . select Grid : 6.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. For Place By. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. click Finish. click Modify. The original continuous grid lines are restored. and press ESC. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. select all of the grid lines. click Structural Column. 37 Select the grid lines again.

for From. select 01 Entry Level. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 45 While pressing CTRL.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 43 Press ESC. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. Next. click Camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. 52 On the Options Bar. and unlock it. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Activate Dimensions. 47 Enter 9000. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. lock it. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. under Floor Plans. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. select grid line A. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. 46 On the Options Bar. If it is unlocked. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. double-click 01 Entry Level. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension.

and click to place the target point of the camera. Creating a Column Grid | 71 . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A.

The current view. When you finish adding beams. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. named 3D View 1 by default. Adding Beams on page 72. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. enter To Building.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. displays in bold under 3D Views. expand 3D Views. under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . In the Rename View dialog. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. and click Rename. 57 Proceed to the next exercise.

Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Finish. 8 While pressing CTRL. The view is currently set to Coarse. double-click 01 Entry Level. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 4 Click Medium. the icon on the right side of the scale. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. click (Create Beam On Grid). 7 On the Options Bar. The selected grid lines display as red. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Beam. 9 On the Options Bar. Adding Beams | 73 . 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. select each grid line.

click (Default 3D View).Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 14 Select one of the beams. and click Select All Instances. press and hold SHIFT. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. select 02 Level. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. select 06 Roof. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Modify. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. right-click. under Floor Plans.

20 Click Cancel. under Constraints. When you created the columns. double-click To Building. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. Adding Beams | 75 . and click OK. view the Top Level parameter. (Element Properties). 06 Roof. right-click. right-click. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. click 24 Press ESC. and if necessary. 25 In the Project Browser.to the 5th level. select 06 Roof. resize the view to see the entire structure. 21 With the column selected. and click Element Properties. for Top Level. under Instance Parameters. All of the columns display as red. 22 On the Options Bar. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. and click Select All Instances. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views.

press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 28 Save the drawing. as lines only. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. double-click South. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. but you want to display them in less detail. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. under Elevations. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.

Adding Braces In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. To better add the braces to the structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. and press ESC to end the command. Adding Braces | 77 . double-click 00 Foundation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you create 8 framing elevation views.29 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Braces on page 77. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation.

NOTE Do not copy or array braces. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 In the Type Selector. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). 11 Using the same technique. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. click Brace. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. 7 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation marker arrow. but when placed the braces are placed. After you add the final brace. The associated framing elevation view displays. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. and when the endpoint snap displays. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. press ESC twice. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. click to specify the start point of the brace. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements.

enter 18000 mm. and press ENTER. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. delete it and redraw it. Adding Braces | 79 . The height of the roof lowers.

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. under Floor Plans. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ENTER. enter 10000 mm.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. but this time add them from right to left.

Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. NOTE As you add braces. under Floor Plans. 21 Select grid line A. 23 In the Project Browser. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. enter 12000 mm. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Adding Braces | 81 . 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. double-click 00 Foundation. and on the Options Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. as shown in the 3D view below. click Activate Dimensions.

31 Save the drawing. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. beams. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. double-click {3D}. lock it. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. under 3D Views. and if necessary. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click and roof height. and drag it away from the structure. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 26 In the Project Browser. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground.24 In the Project Browser. double-click South. 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. double-click 00 Foundation. Test connectivity of the columns. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. Creating a Foundation on page 82. grid size.

and press ESC twice. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. double-click 00 Foundation. and click View Properties. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. and expand Structural Foundations. click Edit. select Unlimited. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Click OK twice. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. for Level. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. After you load the pile cap family. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. under Floor Plans. 9 Close the warning dialog. The pile cap has been added in the view.rfa. In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. expand Families. click Training Files.Before you can add the pile caps. Creating a Foundation | 83 . Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and drag it to the drawing area. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. A warning displays. and how to load specific families into a project. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. under Extents. under View Depth. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for View Range. In the View Range dialog. The foundation pile cap now displays.

When the final pile cap is placed. press ESC twice. and click Create Similar. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. under 3D Views.

rvt. and click Select All Instances. beams. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. you change the types of the columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load new column. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. click Training Files. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and brace families into the project. under 3D Views. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and braces that you used to create the building structure. beam.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. double-click {3D}. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Select one of the columns. All columns in the building model display as red. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 .

you change the brace type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation 1-a. 6 In the Type Selector.6X15. enter 75mm.5CHS. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 15 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View). and click Select All Instances. the braces as well as the beams change.2X101. 10 On the Options Bar.3 In the Type Selector. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice.9. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. 19 On the Design Bar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK. click Modify. for Type. 7 On the Design Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. In the following steps. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 While pressing CTRL. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. The building model displays the round hollow columns. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. click Modify. The brace type changes. select the braces in the elevation one by one. for d. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. click (Element Properties). 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. click Modify. right-click. 18 In the Type Selector. under Dimensions. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. and changing its size parameter. enter 75mm. click Duplicate. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Brace. This not the size that you want to use. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.rvt.rvt. select Auto .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. After the files are linked. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. select m_RRB_structure_complete. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Positioning. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise.Origin to Origin. and click Open. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Copy. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Select Link. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. 8 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the drawing area. 9 In the drawing area. select the linked Revit model. double-click South. structural members. select Levels 00 through 06. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. however.4 In the Project Browser. depending on the project. After the link is established. while pressing CTRL. click (Copy/Monitor). 5 On the Tools toolbar. select Multiple. and walls could also be copy/monitored. In this case. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. Grids.

and click Delete. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. under Floor Plans. 15 In the New Plan dialog. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog.10 On the Options Bar. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . for Floor Plan views. click OK. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). First. 16 Click OK. right-click Level 1. 18 Using the same method. click Finish mode. 13 On the Design Bar. delete the Level 2 floor plan. click Finish. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. while pressing SHIFT. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan.

click OK.19 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. enter Floor Plans. select the Topography : Surface. 26 In the Project Browser. for Name. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. right-click. 24 In the New View Template dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. double-click 00 Foundation. 21 In the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. 25 In the View Templates dialog.

33 Click at the upper left of the grid. click Camera. 34 In the 3D view that displays. under Names. double-click Site.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. under Floor Plans. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. select Floor Plans. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . and click OK. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser.

Adding Floors on page 92. and railings are also created from sketches. stairs. enter To Building. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. such as roofs. expand 3D Views. In this exercise. 36 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 3D View 1. click Training Files. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. To create floors. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename.35 In the Project Browser. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Floors In this exercise. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects.rvt.

and then the first horizontal grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimension. click Lines. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and elements in the current view display as gray. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. select the top floor line. click Floor. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. click (Rectangle). Adding Floors | 93 .Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You are now in the Sketch Editor. under Floor Plans. On the Sketch tab. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Move the cursor to the left. If the grid changes size. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. past the first vertical grid line. On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. Leave this dimension unlocked. double-click 01 Entry Level. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid.

The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. Select and lock the dimensions. At the top left corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left dimension. Enter 300. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. and then press ESC. and click the temporary dimension value. Do not lock the dimensions. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. They display on the floor sketch. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. and change their values to 300 mm. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. select the top floor line.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. press ENTER. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid.

9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. click (Pick Lines). IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. on the Design Bar. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. enter 1500mm. click Lines. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Next. click Edit. and for Offset. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click Floor. under Floor Plans. Select the three remaining floor lines. Adding Floors | 95 . dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. and on the Options Bar. click Quit Sketch. On the Sketch tab. double-click 02 Level. On the Options Bar. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and lock the dimensions.8 Select the floor. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and press ESC. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. using a different sketching technique.

Click the locks to constrain the floors. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Floor. click (Rectangle). 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch. 17 On the Sketch tab. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. and a lock icon displays. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 18 On the Options Bar. click (Align). 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. double-click 03 Level. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 14 On the Design Bar.

28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. double-click {3D}. 35 On the Sketch tab. double-click 01 Entry Level. 31 In the Project Browser. under Views ➤ 3D Views. and lock the edges. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and click OK. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. Alternatively. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor.24 On the Design Bar. 32 Select the floor. under Floor Plans. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. click Edit. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. Adding Floors | 97 . 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Finish Sketch. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. under Floor Plans. and on the Options Bar. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level.

Adding a Roof on page 98. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Click (Pick Lines). You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press ENTER. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1800 mm. To create the roof. click Training Files.rvt. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. double-click 06 Roof. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. click to place the roof line. ■ ■ For Offset. Adding a Roof In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. When a blue dashed line displays. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

for Offset.6 Select grid line 5. enter 300 mm. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. Adding a Roof | 99 . click to place the roof line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). and when the blue dashed line displays. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above).

11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. click (Trim/Extend). and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. select the roof. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. click Finish Roof.10 Press ESC.

and click to specify the section. 17 On the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape).14 On the Options Bar. on grid D. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. click Section. 15 On the Options Bar. for Elevation. move the cursor down below the roof. Adding a Roof | 101 . enter -100 mm.

under Construction. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. double-click 06 Roof. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 Click OK 3 times. select Variable. click Edit/New. click Modify. select the roof. for Structure [1].20 On the Design Bar. for Structure. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. In section. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Edit. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower).

Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. select the section line. Adding a Roof | 103 . You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path.Roof Edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. zoom in to the roof. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. In this case. click (Default 3D View). 40 In the Type Selector. 38 In the 3D view. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 41 Starting with the left front edge.31 On the Design Bar. moving counter-clockwise. and press DELETE. select each edge. on the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. select Fascia : Fascia . 33 In the warning dialog. click OK. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. 37 If necessary. click Modify.

Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. click Modify. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the curtain wall resizes with it.42 On the Design Bar. so if you resize the grid. under 3D Views. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. you add a curtain wall. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the roof 43 In the Project Browser.

click Training Files. click Wall. click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Construction. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. For Level. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 In the Type Selector. enter 600 mm. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter 2100 mm. under Floor Plans. click to place the first curtain wall segment. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. For Height. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. for Spacing. For Offset. select 05 Roof Garden.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . 6 In the Name dialog. Click OK twice. select 01 Entry Level. enter 1050 mm. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. and click OK. enter Retail Storefront. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. for Type. for Spacing. click 01 Entry Level. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint.rvt. The type is saved in the project. for Join Condition. When you duplicate a type. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties).

the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. and lock the dimensions. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 On the Design Bar. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. click Dimension. If you want to hide them. and trim each curtain wall segment. double-click To Building. 15 On the View Control Bar.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. These dimensions are not in a sketch. If the grid moves. so they remain in the view. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. under 3D Views. you can delete the dimensions. click (Trim/Extend).

16 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance on page 107. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance | 107 .rvt. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.

you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 6 Under Visibility. 2 On the View Control Bar. under the element list. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 5 Under Visibility. Do not select Columns. 4 On the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). as these usually represent internal pilasters.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click None. To better work with the curtain wall panels. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 7 Click OK. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. clear one element to clear all the elements. and double-click South. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. All the elements in the list are selected. click All.

double-click {3D}. 10 Select 1 panel. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 18 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. press and hold CTRL. 17 In the Project Browser. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. and click OK. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. select System Panel : Solid.9 On the Design Bar. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Modify. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 12 With the panels selected. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. select Architectural Elevation. under 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 109 . in this case an architectural elevation. in the Type Selector. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing.

20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click To Building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South.19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.

27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. click Modify. and click to select it. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). Creating an Entrance | 111 . 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. and unpin it. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. 24 On the Options Bar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click Curtain Grid. 30 On the Design Bar. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. 32 In the Type Selector. select another mullion to the right. select One Segment.

click (Default 3D View). and view the new entrance. 34 On the View toolbar. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. press TAB until it is selected.

Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. and 4th panels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.38 Press DELETE. 39 Using the same process. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . 3rd. open the North elevation. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. under Graphics. select 02 Level. click Training Files. for Underlay. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Right-click in the view. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties.

and click OK. select the grip closest to the callout head. under Floor Plans. 8 Select the callout. click Callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. and click to complete the callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. The cursor changes to a pencil. and click Rename.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Display Area.

16 Select the section box. and click Flip Section. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 12 Draw a section line. as shown. right-click. 13 Select the section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 Press ESC.

21 In the Type Selector. For Loc Line. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 26 On the Design Bar. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. for Prefer. 25 Press ESC twice. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Options Bar. select Wall faces. 18 In the Rename View dialog. select Finish Face: Exterior.135mm Partition (2-hr). click (Align). and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines.17 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . click Wall. right-click Section 1. expand Sections (Building Section). Click (Rectangle). and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Basic Wall : Interior . enter Section Display Area. Lock both alignments. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. click Dimension.

under Sections (Building Section). 38 On the View Control Bar.) 36 Press ESC twice. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. double-click Section Display Area. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. you modify them to be bulkhead walls.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Ceiling Plans. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 32 In the Type Selector. click Ceiling. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. Next. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and lock the dimension.

and click to select the walls. click Attach. under Sections. 47 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. enter 2700 mm. 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. for Base Offset. Select the 02 Level Floor. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. under Ceiling Plans.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. double-click Section Display Area. enter 2700 mm. click (Element Properties). for Height Offset From Level. 43 On the Design Bar. for Top/Base. press TAB until you select the wall chain. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . and click OK. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click to select the walls. click to select it. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 46 Press ESC. under Constraints. and click (Element Properties). On the Options Bar. and press ESC. under Constraints. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls.

52 In the Type Properties dialog. 54 Click OK. 58 On the Edit toolbar. under Construction. for Type. double-click 01 Entry Level. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . view the ceiling structure. click Cancel. and click . click (Rotate). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click Cancel. click Edit/New. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. under Ceiling Plans. for Structure. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid.

62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. and press ENTER. 61 Press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .60 Click. enter 45.

double-click To Building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. under 3D Views. click Shadows Off. click Shadows On. 66 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 64 On the View Control Bar. 65 On the View Control Bar. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and copy it to the 05 Level. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and for Offset. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. under Floor Plans. and click to create a reference plane to the left. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). double-click 01 Entry Level. Move the cursor over grid line B. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 1500 mm.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. click Ref Plane. and click to create a reference plane to the right.rvt.

and specify a point to create first stair flight. shorten the right reference plane. C. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 7 Using the same method. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. 6 Select the left reference plane.5 On the Design Bar. 2. click Modify. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. click Stairs. and 3. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B.

and specify a point. including its handrails. and select the 2nd reference plane. 12 In the Type Selector.225mm Masonry. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . Move the cursor down. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. The complete stair displays. Click (Rectangle). ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. click Wall. select Basic Wall : Generic . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. beyond the end of the stair. 10 On the Options Bar. select Finish Face: Interior.

18 Using the same technique. enter 1200 mm.15 On the Tools toolbar. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. for Prefer. and press ENTER. click Align. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and lock the alignment. Select the wall. Select the interior face of the wall. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. and click to select it. Click Modify. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. Lock the dimension. and specify a point away from the wall. click Dimension. Select the bottom of the stair. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the dimension value. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Wall faces.

click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . Because the dimension is constrained. a warning displays. 24 On the Standard toolbar. and press DELETE. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. The stair and walls move to the left. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. click Door. 25 While pressing CTRL. select both reference planes. 27 In the Type Selector.21 Select the dimension. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. (Undo). and press DELETE. clear Tag on Placement. TIP To flip the door swing. 23 Select the stair.

40 Zoom in to the stairs. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. For Top Constraint. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .30 On the Design Bar. click Align. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Click OK. 33 Select the stair. select 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. for Multistory Top Level. under Floor Plans. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. (Rectangle). and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (SteeringWheels). 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Under Constraints. select 00 Foundation. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. (Default 3D View). select all 4 walls. and move the cursor to spin the building model. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click 36 On the View toolbar. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. (Element Properties). but if you view the top level of the building. Click OK. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 35 On the View toolbar. for Base Constraint. 44 On the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level.

click (Default 3D View). Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. click see the roof. and lock the alignment. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and click OK. and lock the alignments.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. on the View toolbar. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. (SteeringWheels). 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar.

under Floor Plans. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. click 59 On the View toolbar. for Base Offset. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm. For Top Constraint. double-click 01 Entry Level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties).55 In the Project Browser. 56 Select the shaft. Under Constraints. (SteeringWheels). (Default 3D View). By offsetting the base. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. and click OK.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . click Wall.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Right-click in the view. under Graphics. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. for Underlay. select 06 Roof.rvt. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click View Properties. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click Remove Constraints. and then select the right face of the wall. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 7 On the Tools toolbar. and on the Options Bar. select Elevation: South. and press ENTER. click (Align). 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. select Basic Wall : Generic .225mm Masonry. enter 9750. The exact placement is not important. and click (Fillet arc). and click Open View. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. click Lines. click . 16 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 15 In the error dialog. 17 On the Options Bar. click Edit Profile.

double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. click . select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and click (Circle). click Finish Sketch. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . and open Metric\m_RRB_host. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 In the Type Selector. and press ESC twice. as shown. 6 In the Type Selector.rvt. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. click Component. click Component.5 Meters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.4. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. click Training Files.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . between grid lines C and D. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 5 On the Basics tab. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. under Floor Plans. select M_RPC Tree . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. under Floor Plans. for Type.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. select M_RPC Tree .5 Meters. click Floor. 16 Click Apply. as shown. select the 2 remaining trees. enter 2400 mm. under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm.5 Meters. click (Default 3D View). click Duplicate. click Edit/New. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. click Lines. 18 In the Project Browser. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click 05 Roof Garden. For Offset. 10 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select one of the trees. (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 14 In the Name dialog. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. View the roof.8 On the View toolbar. 17 While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. enter Japanese Cherry 1. 21 On the Design Bar. and then click OK twice. double-click {3D}. for Height.

and click to sketch a line. enter 0 mm. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 29 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to place the line. click (Draw).

34 On the Tools toolbar. 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. clear Chain.30 On the Options Bar. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and click to finish the line.

38 On the Design Bar. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 45 Click OK. 39 Select the sidewalk. Next. for Height Offset from Level. 48 In the Type Selector. and click so he is facing the column. click Duplicate. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In plan view. as shown: (Element Properties). click Finish Sketch. 49 On the Options Bar. enter Sidewalk. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. select M_RPC Male : Alex. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . The completed sidewalk displays. select Rotate after placement. near Column E5. for Type. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. click Component. a photorealistic image displays. 42 In the Name dialog. and on the Options Bar. 43 Click OK twice. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. enter -250 mm. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. under Constraints. click Edit/New. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. When you render an image.

and click (Element Properties). 52 In the Type Selector. 54 In the Type Selector. about 30 degrees. click the car. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). select M_RPC Beetle. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. click Camera. and click to place her on the sidewalk.NOTE If necessary. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 56 Press ESC twice.

View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. 64 Select Alex. Next. under Constraints. double-click West. 60 In the Project Browser. 63 Click the sidewalk. and click OK. under 3D Views. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . under Elevations. click Pick Host. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. click Pick Host. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. 65 Click the sidewalk.59 In the Element Properties dialog. for Offset. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. If the sidewalk changes height. 66 Using the same method. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. double-click To Building. enter -300 mm. When you select a host for a component.

and replace them with a service core. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. After the service core is positioned. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click 6 On the View toolbar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. under Floor Plans. you delete the entire stairwell. walls.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. and shaft opening. click Training Files. (SteeringWheels). Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building.rvt. 4 Press DELETE. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. 3 Select the entire stairwell. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . double-click 05 Roof Garden. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 5 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). including the stairs.

double-click 01 Entry Level. and zoom in to the linked instance. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. right-click m_RRB_core. 13 In the drawing area. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Create Instance. 11 In the Project Browser. expand Groups. click Training Files. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. expand Model. under Floor Plans. and on the Design Bar. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click OK. and notice that the linked file is listed. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. click Modify.rvt. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. click (Align). under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 In the Project Browser.

Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. ■ ■ Click grid line C. 19 On the Design Bar. and click to align the center. 20 On the View toolbar. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 17 On the Design Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. click (top down view).16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click Ungroup. or if the group layout is expected to change. and on the Options Bar. (Default 3D View). NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. 18 Select the core. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. click Modify. click Modify. (SteeringWheels).

146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . where it is hosted within a railing family.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. After you modify it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.

Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor.rvt. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and click to split the floor. and select Glass. 3 In the Conference project. The rendering displays. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. expand Renderings. under Floor Plans. click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Handrail only.rvt. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and on the Options Bar. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. click (Split). click Training Files. expand Families. and expand Railings. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. The floor sketch displays. press and hold CTRL. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . 2 In the left pane of the dialog. in the Project Browser. click Edit. and open Metric\m_Conference. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. double-click 02 Level. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 5 Expand Railing. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 On the Tools toolbar. and Parapet.

and click to place it. and click to draw another line. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. verify that Chain is not selected. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. and on the Options Bar. 24 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 25 Select grid line B. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click Modify. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click Lines. click (Align). 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it.

34 In the Element Properties dialog. select Glass. and click OK. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.rvt project. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click (Align). click Railing. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.26 Select grid line D. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Dimension. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. For Offset. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 30 On the Design Bar. for Type. enter 100 mm. click Railing Properties. 33 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. Lock the dimensions. and click the lock to lock the alignment.

38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Camera. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Dimension. 39 Click Finish Sketch. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.37 On the Design Bar.

You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. 153 . and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. lofty ceilings. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. slight modifications to the building design have been made. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. exterior fire stairs. and a roof garden. balconies. NOTE For training purposes.

154 .

You learn how to create new views from existing views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. elevation. section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. how to create section and elevation views. 155 . and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.

click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 7 In the Project Browser.

and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. double-click Vicinity Plan. Next. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 11 Under Floor Plans. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. and click OK. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.

18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt. 16 Right-click. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.

for Scale. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:100. under Floor Plans.rvt. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 3 In the Type Selector.

and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 .

10 In the Rename View dialog. 15 On the Options Bar. for Scale. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click South East. select Section: Building Section. under Views (all). 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down. and double-click Level 1. select 1:100. 11 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. under Elevations. enter South East. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it.

23 On the View Control Bar.21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 24 Select gridline F. using the blue circular drag grip. and double-click Section 1. expand Sections (Building Section). and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar.

Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Creating Callout Views | 167 . 4 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. select 1:50. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.Resulting callout view . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. for Scale. double-click Level 1.

and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. ■ Select the middle grip. click Modify. and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line.

Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. select 1:50. 9 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. select Detail View: Detail. click Callout. under Sections (Building Sections). 13 In the Type Selector. Creating Callout Views | 169 . The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. for Scale. 14 On the Options Bar. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Modify. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. double-click Section 1. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. and click OK.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

18 In the Rename View dialog.17 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 171 . expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. and click OK. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

rfa. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. open Metric\Families\Annotations. double-click Level 1. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. and click Open. the elevation markers. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. You change the appearance of the section mark head. select Custom-Section Head.

Section Tail – Filled. for Section Head. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. . and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Load into Project. 10 On the floor plan. scroll to Section Marks. select the current project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. 17 Under Category. and can be applied to the section line.Filled. and click OK. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 15 Under Category. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. scroll to Section Line. On the floor plan. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Edit/New. 8 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate.Custom. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Duplicate. select the section line. Section Tail . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and select 2. click the Annotation Objects tab. 19 Click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.5mm Square. clear any others. enter 12. and select 3. enter Section Head – Custom. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 12 For Section Tag. select Section Head .The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.

click Edit/New. Click OK. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Training Files. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.5 mm. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.5mm Square. for Elevation Tag. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 36 In the drawing. and on the Options Bar. enter 6 mm. click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. select 3. enter 12. 40 Press ESC. For Corner Radius. . 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. . open Metric\Families\Annotations. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Load into Project. 34 In the Name dialog. and click Open. select the current project. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 27 Click OK twice. and on the Options Bar. select the callout. select Custom-Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. On the floor plan. select Square.23 In the Type Properties dialog. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all others.rfa. for Callout Tag. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. For Line Weight. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 39 Click OK twice. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select 12. notice the square elevation markers that display.

You learn to create view templates. 46 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 .Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. select Dash. 43 Under Category. filters. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 45 For Line Pattern. masking regions. and visual overrides. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. view regions. 49 Click OK. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. scroll down to Callout Boundary. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 4. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and features blue triangular grips and break marks.Creating a View Template In this exercise. The crop region displays as red. click (Show Crop Region). To accomplish this. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).rvt. 6 On the View Toolbar. 5 On the View Control Bar. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click Zoom to Fit. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. and double-click East. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. under Elevations.

Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. grids. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. elevation markers. 11 Under Visibility. 13 On the View Control bar. under Visibility. levels. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and section lines are now hidden in the view. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Callouts. Creating a View Template | 177 . clear Entourage.

rvt. click Apply. 20 Using the same method. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. under Elevations. edit the crop region as before. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click North.14 In the Project Browser. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click OK. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Apply View Template. double-click North. right-click East. 16 In the View Templates dialog. and click Create View Template From View. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New View Template dialog. under Elevations. and click OK.

under Extents. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4). under Floor Plans. select Level Below (Level 4). right-click. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. click Edit. for View Range. double-click Penthouse. select Penthouse. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Level. Under View Depth. for Bottom. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.rvt. and click Properties. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Click OK twice. and the exterior area on the south side of the building.

select Level 4. under Floor Plans. Click OK twice. right-click.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Bottom. double-click Roof Plan. for View Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Extents. and click Properties. select Roof Plan. for Level. Under View Depth. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser.

Under View Depth. for View Range. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. click Edit. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. 11 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. In the left corner of the building. for Level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Region Properties. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for Bottom. under Extents. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 10 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Unlimited. select Unlimited. click Finish Sketch. Move you cursor diagonally. Click OK twice. 13 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Views (all). click the Filters tab. the fire rating of the walls. expand Floor Plans. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. After you apply the filter. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.17 On the Design Bar. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click Level 1. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. in this case. 1 In the Project Browser. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly.

click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. select the red color. click Remove. 5 In the Filters dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. for Rated Walls.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Override under Patterns. 12 On the Filter tab. 11 Select Rated Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. and apply a color. click Add. and click OK. click <No Override>. and click OK. click Edit/New. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. and click OK. under Projection/Surface. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Select contains. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. 9 Click OK. enter Rated Walls. click (New). under Basic colors. 17 Using the same method. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select Solid Fill. 16 Click OK. under Categories. for Color. for Pattern. select Fire Rating. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Filters. select Walls. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Enter Hr. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. 14 In the Color dialog.

you obscure geometry in portions of a view. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Masking Region. 7 On the View menu. as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. under Floor Plans. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. right-click. and click OK. 9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.rvt. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. select Invisible lines. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Select the crop region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 11 In the Type Selector. and click Rename.

14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Rectangle).12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. click Finish Sketch. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

rvt. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Pattern. 7 Under Cut. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. click black. 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and click OK.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. and click 1: 50. 11 Click OK twice. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . and click Rename. select Walls. under Pattern Overrides. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.Level 1. right-click. select Solid fill. click in the Patterns field. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Visibility. click the current scale. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click Override. right-click. for Color. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. right-click Unit 18 Plan . 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Under Visibility. clear Grids. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. clear Floors. under Visibility.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click.

21 Under Projection/Surface. for Pattern. select Dash. click Override. and click OK. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan.20 Right-click. under Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click <No Override> to apply a color. 23 In the Color dialog. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. select the sofa. click a purple color. right-click. click Projection Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for Color. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice.

right-click. click .28 For Color. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 32 Select one of the lamps. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. select a bright green color. and click OK twice. click Modify. 30 On the Design Bar. click By Category Override. 29 In the Color dialog. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category.

192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. click . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project.33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Training Files. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.Creating Sheets. select A0 metric. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. and click View. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click OK. click Sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 .rvt.

5 When the title block highlights. 7 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. Click OK. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. and select the title block. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Site Plan. expand Sheets (all).Unnamed. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click Modify. For Sheet Number. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . click Modify. For Sheet Name.

13 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. 14 Click OK. click Edit. For Client Name. enter J. enter 15 May. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 2009-1. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Project Status. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Number. For Project Name.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . enter For Approval. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. for Project Address. 2009. Smith. The new project information displays in the titleblock. under Other.

enter Floor Plan. and click Save. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A105 .Sections A108 . 17 In the Project Browser. right-click. select the new sheet name. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you add views to these sheets.Elevations A106 . and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise. select A0 metric. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Elevations A107 .Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click OK. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Name. and click Rename.

under Sheets (all).Elevations. and click to place it.Floor Plan. The red border around the view no longer displays. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). click Modify. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Design Bar. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 .Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click A102 . double-click A104 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Floor Plans. select Level 1. and click to place the view. and drag it to the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser.rvt.

7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click A107 . under Sheets (all). and click to place it. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Sections. and click to place it. and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). align it with the East elevation. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections).

Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. select 1:5. . Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . for View Scale. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and press TAB until it highlights. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and on the Options Bar. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. move the cursor over it. 16 Select title bar. and click OK. zoom in to the grip.

Stairs. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). 18 Under Floor Plans. click Modify.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 19 On the Design Bar. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place it. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. double-click A108 .

and click Activate View. and then make changes and deactivate the view. 5 On the Design Bar. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. under Sheets (all). you must first activate the view on the sheet. click Modify. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. and press ENTER. 2 Select the building section view.rvt. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. enter 16700 mm. In order to do this. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. right-click. double-click A107 . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Sections.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. After you create the sheet. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. and click Deactivate View. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet.6 Right-click.rvt. double-click North. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You modify the view to hide the view title.

enter T. 7 Place the camera as shown. and click OK. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. enter Title Sheet. select the new sheet name. and click Properties. click Camera. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . For Sheet Name. Click OK. The camera view displays. double-click Level 1. select A0 metric. right-click.

For Target Elevation. 14 Under 3D Views. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Far Clip Offset. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. for Eye Elevation. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 11 On the View Control Bar. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 18000 mm. Under Camera. enter 100000 mm. double-click T . 12 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Far Clip Active. enter 1500 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. Under Extents.Title Sheet. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all).8 On the Options Bar.

click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. click Modify. under Graphics. 22 In the Name dialog. enter 635 mm. for Height. select Scale (locked proportions). and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Show title. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click Duplicate. and then click OK. Under Model Crop Size. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar.15 With the view selected. click Size. click Modify. . 25 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. click Edit/New. 24 Click OK twice. enter Viewport/no title mark. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 Select the view on the sheet. select No.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Level 1. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. expand Floor Plans. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. click Training Files. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial.rvt. such as room and window schedules. 207 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan . Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Because of the open style floor plan. Tagging Objects In this lesson. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.

NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Room and Area. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the right. click Room Separation. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left.

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load.6 Using the same method.

rfa. 11 In the Tags dialog. and press ENTER. click Training Files. and the rectangle contains the room tag. type U18-1. and select the room tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 17 Zoom in on the tag number.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click to place the room and tag. click Room. 16 On the Design Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click OK. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. click it. 14 For Offset. verify that Tag on placement is selected. indicating that it can be edited. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. The room tag number displays in blue. type 2400 mm.

Sequential letters are also supported. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Room. type Kitchen. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . type Entry. click Modify. Dining. and press ENTER. click Modify.18 Click the room text label. 19 On the Design Bar. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Using the same method. 22 Click the room text label. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. place rooms and tags. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER. Click to place the new room and tag.

25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. 29 On the Design Bar.Level 2. double-click Unit 18 Plan .Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. The rooms are already placed. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. click Modify. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). 27 On the Design Bar. but they need to be tagged. on the Model Categories tab. expand Lines. and moving clockwise. clear Room Separation. and click OK. click Room Tag. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.Level 1. you learn how to place door and window tags. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. in the Project Browser. clear Leader. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 .rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

101-106. and press ENTER. for room 101. and press ENTER. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. type Corridor.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. For 105. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. select Storage. type Storage. For 103. and press ENTER. For 104. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. select Corridor. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . next to Rows. click New. The room Number is U17-46. add 5 more rooms. for Name. For 102. type Building Entry. 11 Using the same method.

click the Lines field. and press ENTER. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select 9. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Override. under Visibility. 13 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. For Room Separation.■ For 106. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. For Weight. Under Custom colors. 4 Click OK twice. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. click the bright green swatch. under Floor Plans. you add room separation lines. expand Lines. under Projection/Surface. place rooms from a program list. and click OK. In the Line Graphics dialog. and modify room names. type Stair.rvt. In the Lines field. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click the Color field.

click Room. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. draw the horizontal line. First. click Room Separation. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

type 2400 mm.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 14 For Offset. select 101 Building Entry. 13 On the Options Bar. for Room. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). for Room. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select 102 Storage. 11 On the Options Bar.

Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 16 Using the same method.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. under Schedules/Quantities. place the following rooms. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 20 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Design Bar. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). double-click Room Schedule. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.

The Room Style Schedule displays without data. select Rooms. 31 For Key Name. 27 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. under Available fields. and for all 3 finishes. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Base Finish. and click Add. click Schedule/Quantities. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. type As Selected. Floor Finish. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Constraints. while pressing CTRL. 30 On the Options Bar. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .21 On the Options Bar. and Wall Finish. click New. type Units. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 24 Open the Room Schedule. click 23 On the Design Bar. (Element Properties). and click OK. under Category. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. for Rows. clear Room Bounding.

35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Open the Room Schedule.32 Using the same method. under Schedules/Quantities. 43 In the Filter dialog. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 33 In the Project Browser. and click Add. 44 On the Options Bar. 36 Click OK twice. select Units. under Floor Plans. select Room Style. for Room Style. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. right-click Room Schedule. select Units. and click OK. and click Properties. for Fields. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 38 Under U17-8. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. click Edit. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Check None. and click OK. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. double-click Level 1. select Rooms. click (Element Properties). for Room Style. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Available fields. 42 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. under Other. click (Filter Selection).

click OK.46 Open the Room Schedule. expand Floor Plans. under Graphics. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. under Views (all). and 106. select Public. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. (Duplicate). 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. and click Properties. type Room Type. click the Color Scheme field. for Name. 104. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click 5 For Title. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. select Service. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. click OK. select Room Style. For rooms 102 and 105. 103. right-click Level 1. and click OK. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). type Room Type. 9 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and apply it to the Level 1 view. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 48 Save the file. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. for Color.rvt. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. at the warning prompt.

Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. click Edit Color Scheme. expand Lines. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Schemes.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Visibility. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . and clear Room Separation. select Room Type. and click OK. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click Edit. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Color Scheme Legend. clear Visible. click the value in the Color column. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). select the color legend. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. When you move the cursor over the drawing area.

23 Using the same method. type 25 mm. click Modify. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Size. click Edit/New. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar.22 In the Color dialog. under Graphics. 24 Click OK. on the Options Bar. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 Click OK twice. (Element Properties). type 5 mm. 28 Under Title Text. select blue. for Swatch Width. respectively. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. under Custom color.

double-click Building Section. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. select Rooms. under Sections. right-click Building Section. 35 Click OK twice. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Sections. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. under Graphics. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. and select Properties. click Color Scheme Legend. for Color Scheme. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Visibility. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. select Room Type. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Edit. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. and click OK.

select Rooms. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. 45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. and click OK. select all the rooms in the stairwell. select Units. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). for Room Style. under Identity Data. select Public.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click . click . 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. for Room Style. (Filter Selection).

and click . under Key Name for the new row. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. for Rows. 51 On the Options Bar. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . type Suites. 54 While pressing CTRL. double-click Room Style Schedule. click New.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. excluding the stairwell spaces. for Room Style. and click OK. under Identity Data. select Service. under Schedules/Quantities.

and click OK.55 Click . 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. and click OK. The color fill will extend to the roof. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. 59 Under Room Area Computation. under Identity Data. The color fill extends to the roof. verify that At wall finish is selected. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. select Areas and Volumes. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. select the room on the left side of the top floor. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. but not beyond it. for Room Style. under Volume Computations. select Suites.

66 Click OK. type -254 mm. 70 For Limit Offset. 71 Click OK.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . . under Constraints.0. 68 Click . type 0. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level 2. select the stairwell room. click Modify. 72 On the Design Bar. and the living room. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. the dining room. select Loft. under Constraints. 67 On the first level. for Upper Limit.

double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.

Insulation on Plywood Deck . For Then by. select Roofs. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . click Family and Type. under Available fields. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and click OK. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . select Family and Type. and click Add. click Modify. select Material: Description. under Category. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector.EPDM. Select Grand totals. 3 While pressing CTRL. Clear Itemize every instance. 9 Using the same method.

under Available fields. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. click the Formatting tab. type Estimated Cost. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Material: Cost.40 50. select Calculate totals. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. and under Fields. select Currency. select Material: Cost. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK twice. 23 For Field formatting.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. 12 Click OK. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. select Calculate totals. 21 Click OK. and click Add. and click Properties. Under Field formatting. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. under Other. select Material: Area. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 20 For Formula. 17 Click Calculated Value. 19 For Type. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. for Name. for Fields. click Estimated Cost. click Edit. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.

35 The Estimated cost is calculated. adding the shared parameters to a family. and schedule the total distance of each path. select $. you create a shared parameter file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. ensuring consistency across families and projects. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . and reporting the shared parameters. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. for Currency. tag the line.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. 26 In the Project Units dialog. 27 In the Format dialog. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. for Rounding. Digit grouping. which inserts commas after every three digits. and are defined and stored in an external file. creating a generic tag to tag the family. can be used for any number-based parameter. click the Format value. You draw a travel path line. 28 For Unit symbol. 31 Save the file. In this lesson. The cost fields are formatted correctly. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 29 Select Use digit grouping. 30 Click OK twice. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. regardless of category. you create an exiting plan for the building. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. not just for currency. either within family components or within the project template.

2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. 7 Under Parameters. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Create. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK.txt.rvt. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. for Name. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click New.rvt. under Groups. and click OK. type Exiting. type Travel Distance. for Name. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. 9 Under Parameters. 11 Click OK twice. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for Type of Parameter. click New. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. and click Save. for File name. type Path ID. select Length. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. click Training Files.

14 On the Design Bar. following the equals symbol (=). 8 Select Instance. select Shared parameter. for Group parameter under. click Add. 13 Click Apply. in the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Projects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 11 Click OK. click Family Types. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Travel Distance Formula. 15 If necessary. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project.rvt. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. under Parameter Type. and click OK. under Dimensions. If you have multiple projects open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. under Parameter Data. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. group it under Dimensions. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click Training Files. 9 In the Family Types dialog.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. click Add. and select Instance. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and click Select. under Parameters.rfa. type Length.rvt. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 10 Using the same method. and click OK. and click OK. select Constraints. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 3 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.

25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click parameter(s) to label). 21 In the Edit Label dialog.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog.rft. select Travel Distance. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 24 Click OK twice. click (Add Parameter). 19 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. and click OK. under Category Parameters. click Training Files. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select Travel Distance. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Select. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. click Label. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.

click Modify. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and press DELETE. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. select Path ID. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 29 In the drawing window. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. for File Name.rfa. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rvt is selected. and click Save. 35 Save the file. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and move it down. click Load into Projects.28 On the Design Bar. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. and click OK.

After the lines are tagged. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. and click in the center of the corridor. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Tagging. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. select Chain. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Placing.rvt. above the exterior door as shown. double-click Exiting Plan . 6 Move the cursor to the right. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. click Component. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.

17 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select the 2 dashed travel lines. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 8 On the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected.Tagging. move the cursor near the right corner. under Constraints. type 1-1. Placing. for Path ID. and click OK. and click outside of the building. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 .7 Move the cursor down. clear Leader. click Modify. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.Level 2. click Component. through the door. double click Exiting Plan . 13 While pressing CTRL. 12 On the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. click Tag ➤ By Category. 10 On the Options Bar.

and click above the door to the stair. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. move the cursor to the left. click Modify. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Component. and click.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click in the stair. 20 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor down. 21 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. Placing. 30 Using the same method. click Modify. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. type Level 1 Exit Distance. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 27 On the Design Bar. type 2-1. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. for Path ID. 33 For Name.Tagging. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. under Category. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 28 While pressing CTRL. under Constraints. .

select Path ID. 44 In the Project Browser. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and click OK. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 41 Under Fields. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. for Filter by. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. 50 Save the file. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. type 1-. 40 Click the Formatting tab. click Training Files. while pressing CTRL. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and under Field formatting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 42 Click OK. 43 In the Project Browser. 35 Click the Filter tab. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click Add. for Filter. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the second field. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. in the first field. under Available fields. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Travel Distance. 46 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. type 2-.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. in the third field. 38 For Sort by. 49 Click OK twice. select Path ID. select contains. select Calculate totals. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. under Other. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 45 In the Rename View dialog. and in the third field. 36 For Filter by. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls.

expand C . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . and click OK. click the Fields tab. and select C1010145 . right-click the Design Bar. 9 Click OK twice. for Assembly Code.Fixed Partitions. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. select the following fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.Interiors ➤ C10 . under Identity Data.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. and click View. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Generic . and click Properties. click the Value field.152 mm. click Schedule/Quantities. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . 10 In the schedule. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Partitions . under Categories. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Walls.Partitions ➤ C1010100 .Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . 4 Under Available fields.

260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb. click OK. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. and click OK to create the database. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database.11 Close the exercise file.rvt. type Revit_Project. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. select a location for the database file. the database display may be different than that shown. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. click the File Data Source tab. 11 Click OK 3 times. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 3 Click New. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Training Files. 8 In the New Database dialog. under Database. click Create. and click Next. 1 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog.mdb). 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. for Database Name. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. 6 Click Finish. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 9 Under Directories. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Next.

Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 13 Close the exercise file. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. in addition to the Id column. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. For example. Additionally. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.

262 .

263 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

In order to detail from the building model. These components display at the required scale. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. 297 . you trace over the building model geometry. you detail the roof overhang of a project building.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. and metal studs. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. add detail components. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. plywood. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. like a standard door header condition. In the callout view.

5 In the alert dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. you detail the view of the roof edge. You load detail components. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click OK. click Detail Component. as well as detail lines. select As underlay. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.rfa. which means that all detail components. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. After you add components. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The roof overhang detail displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. double-click the detail callout head. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. and click Open. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and insulation objects. They are also view specific. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Detailing the View In this exercise.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Exact location is not important. region objects.

click Duplicate.5mm. 16 Click OK twice. 13 In the Name dialog.8 Delete the component. click Modify. click Edit/New. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Element Properties). for Pattern ➤ Detail. enter 406. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. select Corrugated Metal. 17 In the drawing area. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. Detailing the View | 299 . click Repeating Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 19 On the Design Bar.

TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. and click Open. and on the Edit toolbar.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. ■ ■ Click Modify. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. click Detail Component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 24 In the Type Selector. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click (Move). Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.rfa.

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.Because you still have several components to load. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. 31 To properly orient the component. click Training Files. click OK. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Detail Component. 29 On the Design Bar. and place it in the detail view as shown. you load them as a group from a single file.rvt. 30 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. and click Open. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Detailing the View | 301 . 33 In the Type Selector.

The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. select Chain.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 37 Click Modify. 35 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 38 Select the horizontal segment. click the Flip instance arrows.

Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. click Insulation. and on the Edit toolbar. enter 140mm. For Offset. ■ Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. click (Move). 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. select to near side. Detailing the View | 303 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Detail Component. 42 Click Modify.

rvt. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. and lock the component. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. click Detail Lines. meaning they display only in this view. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. you add lines to your detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. they are view specific. 47 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 51 Click Modify. Like detail components. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component.45 In the Type Selector. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . as shown.

For Offset. enter 10mm. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . click Detail Lines. 7 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 11 In the Type Selector. as shown. enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. For Offset.4 Click Modify. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER.

17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. as shown. and clear Chain. select Chain. and draw the detail lines as shown. click (Draw).

For Offset. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. select Vapor Barrier. click Detail Lines. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. and click Properties. When you turn the display model off. and click OK. select Thin Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. Click (Pick Lines). for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and press ENTER. select Do not display. 26 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 307 . select the Penthouse level line. enter 10mm. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click. 24 On the View Control Bar.18 In the Type Selector. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line.

Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. select M_Break Line. you add text notes to complete the detail. 32 Click Modify. click Detail Component. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 30 In the Type Selector.29 On the Design Bar.

and click to place the dimension. click Dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify. click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. Enter the text. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. right-click. and save the exercise file. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click 6 In the Filter dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.7 Select the dimension line. Creating Detail Components In this exercise.rvt. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. Creating Detail Components on page 310. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog.. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click.Keynotes. enter Typ. select a text note. and click the dimension text. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. enter Roof Overhang Detail . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. and click Rename. click Roof Overhang Detail. (Filter Selection). under Text Fields. and press DELETE. for Suffix. on the Options Bar. click Select All Instances. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote.

7 Click Modify. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 16 Click Modify. and click Open. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. while pressing CTRL. and selecting the chain. click Training Files. select Medium Lines. 14 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rft. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. pressing TAB. in the Type Selector. select all the coping linework.

32 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Using the same method used previously. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . and click Save. 24 On the Options Bar. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. 27 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 21 To place the component. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Using a window. clear Detail Items. 28 On the Options Bar.rfa. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and the component can be placed in the detail. 25 In the Filter dialog. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. you place keynotes on objects. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. enter Roof Edge. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 30 In the drawing area. The original linework remains selected. and click Open. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. navigate to your preferred location. Adding Keynotes on page 312. click Detail Component. click Load into Projects.18 In the Save As dialog. click Training Files. click . and click OK. for File name. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . While pressing SHIFT. select the coping.Keynotes view is not the open view. double-click it in the Project Browser. 22 Click Modify. delete the underlying linework. 26 Press DELETE. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.

B5. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210.rvt. use keynote 07645. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.C1. click Edit/New. use keynote 06160. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click Open. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. click Training Files. In the Keynotes dialog. 6 Click Modify. 63mm Rigid Insulation. (Element Properties). Click to place the leader arm. Roof Edge4.D11. 19mm Plywood. click Keynote ➤ Element. select the metal fascia with drip edge. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Keynotes | 313 . 2 In the alert dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. For the metal coping.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. and click .D11. click in the Value column.F1. FasciaProfile_1. use keynote 06110. 11 Click OK 3 times. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. using keynote 07460. For the 50 x 200. 12 On the Design Bar.20 Ga. navigate to 07645. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .F1. use keynote 06110. 18 Save the file. select Corrugated Metal.D1.I1.A8. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 22mm Corrugated Steel . For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. 15 In the Type Selector. 17 Keynote the component. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 50 x 150. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. click Keynote ➤ Element. click Detail Component. use keynote 06110. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 09250.G1. For the 50 x 300. use keynote 06160. You do this in order to keynote the component. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314.

15 Click Modify. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Line Detail Component. click Duplicate. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 6 Lock the line. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. and select the right end point.rvt. select the left end point of the reference line. 13 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Name dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. and click Open. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. click Training Files. 22 On the Options Bar. click Load. and click Modify. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 11 Press DELETE. 24 While pressing CTRL. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click Detail Component. and m_Light Line Detail Component. click Training Files. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Select the component.rft. click Load into Projects. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Save. click Lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click (Element Properties). select Medium Lines. click Detail Component. 9 On the Design Bar. for File name. 20 Click OK 3 times. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Edit/New.

37 Click OK 3 times. 49 With the component selected. click in the Value column.G1. 29 In the drawing area. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. and click OK. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog.A1. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. click Edit/New. 48 Using the same method used previously. 38 On the Design Bar. 46 Click Modify. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. and assign it keynote 07260. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 42 Using the same method used previously. 31 Select the component.A5. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. click Detail Component. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . enter EPDM Membrane. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 44 On the Design Bar.25 Next. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 30 Click Modify. click (Move). 28 In the Type Selector. and assign it keynote 06110. click Detail Component. 27 On the Design Bar. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 40 Click Modify. against the 19mm plywood. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the lower end at the break line. and click . and hidden) used in the view. on the Edit toolbar. 34 In the Name dialog. name the component Air Barrier. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . 47 Select the component. 41 Select the component just added. invisible. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530.

leaving the detail component lines. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. and click . select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 55 Click Modify. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 53 On the Options Bar.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain. 52 In the Type Selector. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component.

rfa. 63 In the drawing area.rfa. Air Barrier. in the Type Selector. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. select the component. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 68 In the drawing area. name the component Vapor Barrier. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.A4.58 Using the method used previously. 67 In the Type Selector. click Keynote ➤ Element. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Load into Projects. and Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. and assign it keynote 07260. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 50 x 200 Framing. select Invisible Lines. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.

and assign it keynote 07210. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 70 Using the method used previously.. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.A9.A4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 72 Save the file. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and click . Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the text editor. and press TAB. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. click Browse. Enter 07463. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. name the component Batt Insul. and close the text editor.A1. and press TAB.txt. add a keynote for the component.69 Select the component. and press ENTER. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. click File menu ➤ Save. under Keynote Table. 71 In the drawing area. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. The database file opens in a text editor.rvt. Enter 07460.

■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. click Keynote ➤ Element. In the Type Selector.A1. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07463. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). click to place the leader. select Absolute. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Each keynote displays as a simple number. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. select all the keynotes. 9 In the drawing area. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click to place the note. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. 14 Save the file.txt. and click OK. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. you learn how to create a drafted detail.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. These details do not update with changes to the building model. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. 13 Click Modify. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 11 Click Modify. and click OK. and click Open. under Path Type. After you create a drafting view.

Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 .dwg. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 6 In the Project Browser. For Positioning. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. click Training Files. The detail that you import is in DWG format.rvt. select Black and White. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. and click OK. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. enter EPDM Metal Coping. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.Center to Center is selected. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. For Colors. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Click Open. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. for Scale. right-click Drafting 1. verify that Auto . select 1 : 5. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 8 Proceed to the next exercise.

6 Select the callout. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. delete the existing value. click Edit/New. 5 Click Modify. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select Reference other view. 12 Click OK twice. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. click Rename. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. for New. 3 On the Options Bar.No Reference. click Callout.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. and click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Rename dialog. enter Detail .

Elev. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . The callout is updated with the sheet information. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet./Det. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. double-click A105 ./Sect. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 18 Save the file. click Modify. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail.No Reference). and double-click the callout. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar.

11 In the Name dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. Board. for Name. click Region Properties. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. select Gypsum-Plaster. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. click Edit/New. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Duplicate. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 12 In the Type Properties dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. . for Name. 14 Click OK 3 times. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click OK. enter Gyp.rvt. 5 In the Type Selector. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Filled Region. 3 On the View Control Bar.

and on the Edit toolbar. click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). select the width dimension. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 20 On the Design Bar. Draw a rectangle as shown. 18 While pressing CTRL.5mm. click 22 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . select the left and bottom edges of the region. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. 19 In the Type Selector. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. select Wide Lines. click (Draw). 17 Click Modify. and enter 20. click .15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. click Edit/New. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Wood . 33 Click OK 3 times. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 25 Click Modify. click Region Properties. . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. click Filled Region. 24 Select the mirrored region. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Duplicate. 30 In the Name dialog. Move the cursor up.Finish.Finish. for Name. select Wood . 31 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Finish Sketch. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 39 In the Type Selector. and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. select Medium Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click (Align).5mm. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. sketch the new region as shown. 37 On the Design Bar.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Draw a rectangle as shown. click Filled Region. click (Rectangle). verify that the thickness is 19mm. click . in the Type Selector. 38 On the Design Bar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point.

47 Click the reference plane. enter 10mm. click 48 Click Modify. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 46 On the Tools toolbar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. For Offset. click Ref Plane. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. enter 6mm.42 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. (Align). 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar.

For Offset. and press ENTER. Move the cursor right 25mm. click Finish Sketch. and click to select the point. Move the cursor down 305mm. enter 0. and click to select the point. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 56 On the Design Bar.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Select Chain. 54 On the Tools toolbar. and select the bottom horizontal line. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor left 25mm. click (Trim/Extend).

59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. For Offset. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the height dimension. 60 Select the left. click Detail Component. enter 76. 65 On the Options Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. and right edges of the door panel region. top. enter 3mm. 58 In the Type Selector. 62 Select the left detail line. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 61 Click Modify. and click Open. and press ENTER. click Training Files.rfa. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 69 Select the bolt. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.2mm. 68 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select Medium Lines. click Load. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side.

Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 71 On the Options Bar. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. use the images as a guide. 76 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. and click Open. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. click Detail Lines. click Load. select Wide Lines.70 On the Design Bar.rfa. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Training Files.

332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 87 Click Modify. 82 Select the rectangle. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. click . click Detail Lines.78 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 79 In the Type Selector. (Mirror). 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 80 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. select Thin Lines. 84 On the Design Bar. 85 On the Options Bar. click .

click (Mirror). 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 92 Select the line.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region.

TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 97 On the Options Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. select M_Break Line. 102 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. click . select the length dimension. 101 On the Design Bar. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. click Detail Component. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. and press ENTER. enter 3mm. 99 Click Modify. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 107 On the Design Bar. using the Drag Text grip. 106 Click to place the dimension. and click Modify. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Dimension. drag the text for the smaller dimension. click Dimension.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. 108 In the Type Selector. 105 In the drawing area. 110 Select the dimension line. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.5mm Arial. and click Modify.

and enter Varies. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. click Dimension. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 113 Under Text Fields.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. under Dimension Value. 118 Select Modify to end the command. 114 Click OK. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . select Replace With Text. enter See Schedule. and click the dimension text.5mmArial. under Dimension Value. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.2. select Replace With Text. and then click the dimension text. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. for Below. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar.

Enter 225 mm @ Type C. and click Modify. click (Add Right Arc Leader). and on the Options Bar. click Text. 127 Enter Gyp.121 Click OK. Board. and click to place the text. select the gypsum board region on the left. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. 123 Click OK. 125 In the Options Bar. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. 126 In the drawing area. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 128 Select the note. click to create an arced leader.

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file.

The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. and double-click East. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Training Files. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 339 .

7 On the Design Bar.Hexagon. click Modify. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote .rfa. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. type 1. click Training Files. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. 8 Select the keynote. for Number of Leaders. click Symbol.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar.

click (Copy). type Seal existing doors and insulate. 13 Select the tag.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. and click above the tag to place the copy. click (Element Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 341 . under Identity Data. for Text. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

14 With the copy selected. 19 With the tag selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 15 For Text. 18 Using the same method. and on the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). 17 Click OK. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. click Copy. 16 For Tag. (Mirror). and click. on the Options Bar. type B. type Repair existing door surround. on the Edit toolbar. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Remove all existing windows. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall. using the table as a reference. 22 Optionally. Repair as required. Tuckpoint as required.21 On the Design Bar. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. and moving counter-clockwise. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. click Modify. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Repair existing door surround. Clean existing concrete loading dock. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 .

Clean cut and repair wall as required. and drag it to the sheet.Elevations. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 27 In the column header (text). expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Add. On the Formatting tab. for Heading. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click OK. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Tag. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. type Exterior Construction Notes. 26 Click OK. select Tag. and for Alignment. verify that Arial is selected. 29 In the Project Browser.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. type Description. and click Add. for the value. expand Sheets (all). Create. select Exterior Construction Notes. On the Appearance tab. Select Text. type Mark. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. for Note block name. select Center. for Header text. and double-click A103 . format. and select Bold. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. type 6 mm. for Sort by. under Available fields. 28 In the Project Browser. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.

Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. double-click T . Using Drawing Lists In this lesson.31 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).rvt. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet.

in the first field. expand Schedules/Quantities. and in the third field. under Sheets (all). and click Add. 5 In the list title field. and click Add. for Filter by. select Sheet Number. select does not equal. ■ 4 Click OK. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 6 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. type T. select Sheet Number. double-click T . Select Sheet Name. for Sort by.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. under Available fields. The drawing list displays. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the second field. select Sheet Index. 7 In the Project Browser. On the Filter tab. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Title Sheet. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. and expand the right column to accommodate the text.

Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. On construction documents. windows. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. 11 Save the file. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. click Modify. On construction documents. and door frames. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. Training File Using Legends | 347 .9 On the Design Bar. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Finally. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. doors. and so on). door frame schedule. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. For the text.

click Duplicate. type Typical Symbol Legend. click . 10 For Text Size.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. click Symbol.Open Level Head . you create a text type with the necessary size. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click Edit/New. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Arial.rvt. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . type 3mm. click Text. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. for Name. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 For Text Font. and click OK.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . type Legend Text. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

expand Legends. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected. and double-click A101 . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 14 Working from the top down. and click to place it.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and for Leader. click Typical Symbol Legend. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 16 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Sheets (all).

double-click A102 . 22 On the Design Bar. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. 19 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet.17 In the Type Selector. under Sheets.Unit 18. 23 Save the file. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 For Scale. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Legend Component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and press ENTER. select 1 : 50. and click OK. select Section.rvt. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. type 900 mm. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. For Host length. type 4th Floor Wall Types. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. For View. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. select Medium for Detail Level. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 5 On the View Control Bar. for Name.

verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 10 Select the second wall. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 13 On the Options Bar. click Text. 12 In the Type Selector. for Family.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Leader. click to add text without a leader. click Modify.

The text note with leader is added to the legend. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 19 Type the following text. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . right-click Sheets (all). Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 23 In the Project Browser. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. and drag it to the new sheet. select Level 4. and click New Sheet. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. click OK to accept the default titleblock.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

click Modify to end the command. The open drawings are both visible. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4.25 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Legends. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 26 On the Design Bar. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet.

select Detail Level: Medium.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 35 On the View Control Bar. 34 Select the patio divider wall. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. click (Match Type). The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 In the floor plan view.

Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. You can create a sequence of revisions.36 Optionally. double-click Level 4. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Using the table. or changes in building material availability. In this exercise. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. contractor inquiries. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . These changes can be due to owner requests. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. click 37 Save the file. under Floor Plans. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.

When you use this option. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. if the active revision is number 1. 7 Under Show. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. In general. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . If you select Per Sheet. verify that Per Project is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. For example. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. When Issued is selected.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. for Numbering. type a date. In most instances. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. 5 For Description. yet as concise as possible. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. If Visible is not selected.

You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. under Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. you make changes to the project floor plan. 3 Select the divider. Revision clouds have read-only properties. move the cursor up. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar.8 Click OK.rvt. click Modify. 5 Select the divider. double-click Level 4. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click (Move). Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. including revision number and revision date. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 4 On the Edit toolbar. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 9 Save the file.

10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click Revision Cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . In the Snaps dialog. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and click OK. click near the partition you moved. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. 11 On the Design Bar. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Snaps Off. 8 In the drawing area.

15 Under the Revision Clouds category. for Line Weight. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. click the Annotation Objects tab.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 16 Click OK. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you load a revision tag into the project. select 6. 17 Save the file. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.

If the cursor is just inside the cloud. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Tags dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. You then issue a revision. click Tag ➤ By Category. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 12 Save the file. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed.rvt. Because you chose to number by project. click Training Files. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . 6 Click Load. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 10 In the drawing area. select Leader. 8 In the Tags dialog.rfa. click Tags. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and because the revision is the first in the project. you need to add one. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. click OK. 11 Click to place the tag. scroll down to Revision Clouds. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 4. Working with Revisions In this exercise. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. 7 In the left pane of the dialog.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

and enter a date. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 7 For Description.Unnamed. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You can continue to add revisions. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. type Modify Paving Area. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. NOTE After you issue a revision. under Sheets. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can no longer modify it. select Issued. double-click A107 . You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. click Add. with the description Relocate Door. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you prevent further changes to the revision. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. and enter a date for the revision. 9 Click OK. 8 Add another revision row. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision.rvt.

for Revision. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. apply Seq. in the drawing area. 15 On the Options Bar. 2 .Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. click to add a revision clouds.Unnamed. Working with Revisions | 363 . select Revision Cloud. double-click Level 4. 3 . select the revision cloud.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock.Modify Paving Area. 13 Click Finish Sketch. select Seq. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. double-click A107 . select Tag ➤ By Category. 11 On the Drafting tab. 20 On the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 10 In the Project Browser. 19 To add tags. 17 Using the same method learned previously. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. under Floor Plans. 12 In the drawing area.

25 Click OK twice. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. you edit the titleblock family. Click Options. for Numbering. delete the first 3 characters. clear Issued. beginning with "D". and rotation) to the revision schedule. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. height. select Alphabetic. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . You do this so that the revision can be changed. select the titleblock. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. For each revision. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 26 In the drawing area. for Sequence.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences.

and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. for Appearance. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 33 Select the schedule header. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. Clear Blank row before data. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. for Build Schedule. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. and click Properties. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Working with Revisions | 365 . 34 On the Design Bar. 28 In the alert dialog. and press DELETE. Select Outline. click Modify. click Load into Projects. select Bottom-up. click Yes. 30 In the Element Properties dialog.27 On the Options Bar. click Edit Family. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Select Grid lines. click Yes. click Edit. under Other. right-click Revision Schedule. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. and drag it above the schedule area. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built.

select the revision schedule. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Other.. When the height property is variable. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. for Rotation on Sheet. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 45 On the Appearance tab. for Heading.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. right-click Revision Schedule. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. select 90° Counterclockwise. select User defined. enter Rev. for Height. and click Properties. for Formatting. With a user-defined height. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. open the titleblock family for editing. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. click Edit. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. and on the Options Bar.

you learn to import information (such as images. text. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. click Yes. click Load into Projects.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . 51 Save the file.

and place it on a sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Importing Image Files In this exercise. double-click T . click Modify. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click T . 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.JPG. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click to add text without a leader. 3 On the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Title Sheet. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 1 In the Project Browser. for Leader.rvt. click Training Files. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Text.

11 Save the file. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . click Modify. 6 Select the text. 9 On the Design Bar. with the new text box still selected. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet.

and saved as Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 4 Under Printer.mdi.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click A102 . type Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. This step has been completed for you. for Name. click File menu ➤ Print. This exercise demonstrates a common method.JPG. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. click Desktop. click Training Files. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. 7 In the Revit Architecture window.JPG. 5 Click OK. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 3 In Microsoft Excel. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.Unit 18. click Modify. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 1 In the Project Browser. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.rvt. and click Save. 10 On the Design Bar.xls. This process may vary from system to system. 12 Save the file. for File name. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. under Sheets.

371 . as well as a large lab building. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. or footprint. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The large floor plan. called dependent views. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files.

2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. select the crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. double-click Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. The dependent view opens. for Name. and click OK. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 6 In the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. right-click Level 2. under Level 2.Aviary. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 .

8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

right-click Level 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 11 In the Project Browser. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Labs. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. enter Level 2 .10 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. 15 Select the crop region. 12 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and on the Zoom flyout. 14 Click in the drawing area.

click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Matchline. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click in the drawing area. click Modify. double-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 24 On the Design Bar. and click. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm.

click Level 2 . for Line Weight. 27 Under Matchline. enter Level 2 Aviary. right-click A101 . for Name. 31 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 28 For Line Pattern.Unnamed. click the Annotation Objects tab. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. select Double Dash. and drag it onto the sheet.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select 9. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. expand Sheets.Aviary. click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click Rename. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 33 In the Project Browser.

Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. and place the Level 2 .Aviary is selected. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. double-click Level 2. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . for Target view.35 On the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. click View Reference. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 39 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click Modify. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .

41 On the Options Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. click Modify. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. for Target view. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 45 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. click Zoom To Fit. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline.

49 If.Aviary. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view.46 In the Project Browser. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 47 On the View Control Bar. click the far right control. double-click Level 2 . select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. under Floor Plans. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 48 Select the crop region. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. click (Show Crop Region). after modifying the annotation crop region.

leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. but are not placed on sheets. and click Apply Dependent Views. select all views in the list. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 52 In the Project Browser. 54 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Level 2. and click OK.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). under Floor Plans. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 51 On the View Control Bar. expand Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 53 In the Select Views dialog.

57 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view. click Training Files. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

right-click Dependent on South Elevation. click (Hide Crop Region). and drag it toward the center of the view. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. enter South Elevation . cropping the view to the lab building. and click OK.The dependent view opens. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right.Left. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. expand South Elevation. 7 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the drawing area. cropping the view to the aviary. enter South Elevation . and click Rename. right-click South Elevation. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser.Right. select the Crop Region. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise.

■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. click Camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. The perspective view displays.rvt.

as shown. and select the crop boundary. right-click 3D View 1. and adjust the field of vision. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. in the Project Browser. double-click Site. If the camera is not shown in the view. With the camera shown. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Depending on camera placement. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and click Show Camera. as necessary.3 Zoom out.

6 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Project Browser.Day. right-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. and click Rename.Day to open the view. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. 10 Save the file. enter Exterior . double-click Exterior . 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.

and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior.Day. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You then duplicate the view. under 3D Views. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise.rvt. modify render settings. and render a daytime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. You adjust cloud settings as required. select Sky: Cloudy. for Setting. and click Rename. select Edit/New. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. under Background. and click Render. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. select Spring Equinox. In this case. select Medium. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You create a location and time for the rendering. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . NOTE If a background image is required.Santa Monica. 5 In the Rename dialog. for Sun. 3 In the Rendering dialog. enter Spring Equinox . under Lighting. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog. 3pm. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 8 Under Quality. for New. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day.

10 In the Rendering dialog. click Desktop. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. For Files of type. click Show the rendering. click Export. click Show the model.9 In the Rendering dialog. Click Save. select Portable Network Graphics (*.png). 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . After the image is rendered. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

21 In the Light Groups dialog. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. 27 In the Rendering dialog. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. and click OK. and click Artificial Lights.Day view to Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings. dialog. enter Pool Lights. click Render. enter Pool House Lights. add 30 :Sconce Light .Night. and click Move to Group. 25 Using the same method.Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights. To select a sequential list. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. for Name.120V.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 16 With the Exterior . 19 In the New Light Group dialog.Flat Round : 60W . 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK. click New. right-click Exterior .Flat Round : 60W .Day.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . for Name.Night view open.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. highlight 9 :Sconce Light . select the first light. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog.120V to the Pool Lights group. under Ungrouped Lights. under 3D Views. click OK. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and select the last light. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. on the View Control Bar.Flat Round : 60W . and click OK. click New.Flat Round : 60W . for Scheme. 22 Using the same method. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . under Group Options.Night. click Dialog). press and hold SHIFT. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . verify that Pool Lights is selected. under Lighting. select Exterior: Artificial only. under Group Options. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.

33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Show the model. click Adjust Exposure. In this example. 32 Save the file. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . After the image is rendered. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. for Exposure Value. and click OK. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. under Image. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. you change the brightness of the exposure. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 31 Close the Rendering dialog.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. enter 4. 30 In the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session.

define the perspective view and rendering settings.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house.rvt. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise. render the views. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and finally. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Level 1. and place the component inside the pool house. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. 2 Zoom in to the pool house. under Floor Plans. ■ (Rotate). click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. select RPC Female : YinYin. Exact placement is not important. 6 Select the figure. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Adding RPC People | 413 . and on the Edit toolbar. the person’s line of sight. click Component.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector.

13 On the Design Bar. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. By default. for Render Appearance Properties. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 12 Click OK 3 times. click Edit. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. you can enable this option. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click (Element Properties). under Parameters. click Modify. under Identity Data. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. on the Options Bar. 14 Save the file.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. select Cast Reflections.

c_Pool_House_in_progress. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.15 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.

416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Properties. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under Extents.The perspective view displays. under 3D Views. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 11 In the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. in addition to the 3D view. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . select the section box. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click Level 1. 9 In the Project Browser.

14 In the 3D view. 13 In the South Elevation view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . size the box as shown. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. select the section box. size the box as shown.

Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view.15 Maximize the 3D view. 17 Save the file. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. and curtain walls. To create a daytime view.

6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. c_Pool_House_in_progress. You can specify a lower quality. and click Rename. clear Pool Lights. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. right-click 3D View 1.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme.rvt. 2 In the Rename View dialog. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 Click Artificial Lights. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. enter Interior . 4 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Draft. and click OK. under Lighting. and click OK. for Setting. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option.Night. under 3D Views. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. After these settings are established. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. 7 Under Quality. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. select Interior: Artificial only. you turn them off for this scene.

You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. for Daylight Portal Options. you must create a custom setting. 13 In the Rendering dialog. select Interior: Sun only. select Region. right-click Interior . click 14 For Setting. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. By default they are turned off. For sunlit interiors. click Copy To Custom. For more information on daylight portals.Day. The preset schemes are read-only. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. You create a view for the interior during the day. select Edit. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. for Sun. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. but the space will receive standard daylighting.Night. and click OK.9 Close the Rendering dialog.Santa Monica. 17 In the Rendering dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. (Show Rendering Dialog). the daylight portals can be turned on. and click Render. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. In this case. for Scheme. 3pm. select Curtain Walls. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . in order to turn on daylight portals. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. select Spring Equinox .

click Show the model. and close the Rendering dialog. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area.18 In the Rendering dialog. and on the Options Bar. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. enter 10. 20 In the Rendering dialog. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Adjust Exposure. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. under Image. Click OK. click Properties). enter 1. select the column on the right. In the next steps. For Saturation. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

click (Show Rendering Dialog). enter 90.6. select Printer. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. 24 In the Materials dialog. As size and DPI are increased. add a bump map to create texture. and click Render. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select High. click OK. under Output Settings. select Scale (locked proportions). and on the Options Bar. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. For Bump. select Based on wood grain. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. the render time increases significantly. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Click OK. and click OK. 32 In the Rendering dialog. for Resolution. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 26 Click Update Preview. 23 With the column still selected. click the dimensions for Size. select Wood. clear Region. You change the varnish setting.22 In the Element Properties dialog. For Rotate. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 30 In the drawing area. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. 29 In the Rendering dialog. select the crop boundary. For Width. for Setting. enter 5''. 28 In the Rendering dialog. For Amount. select Unfinished.

you rendered an exterior and an interior view. or section view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view.The rendered image displays. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. In a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. The walkthrough path is a spline. elevation. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. independent of the Revit Architecture software. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

and click the tab in the context menu. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . expand Floor Plans. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected. click Training Files. click Settings ➤ Project Units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and change unit formats as desired. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. proceeds through the dining room. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. on the Options Bar. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. If you prefer to use metric values. click Walkthrough. and double-click 1st Floor. right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise.rvt. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse.

6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. click Finish. and double-click Walkthrough 1. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. on the Options Bar. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed.

for Width. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and click OK. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 13 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. and select the crop boundary. for Frame. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 16 On the Options Bar. enter 16''. If it is not. enter 9''. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 14 Click . 17 Click . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 11 Under Change. click Edit Walkthrough. and for Height. click the dimensions for Size. verify that Field of view is selected. enter 1. and click OK.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 12 On the View menu. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. on the Options Bar.

under Extents. 2 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough.The walkthrough plays. click (Element Properties). double-click 1st Floor. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Floor Plans. press ESC. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise.rvt. clear Far Clip Active.

Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and drag it to the location shown. select Path. 7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position. for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip).

When you export the walkthrough. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. select <Shading>. double-click Walkthrough 1. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. under Walkthroughs. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the Options Bar. specifying the number of frames. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. and click OK. click Edit Walkthrough. or rendering. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Under Format. shading. and click OK. hidden line. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. . specify a path and a file name for the AVI. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. under Output Length. for Compressor. The walkthrough is recorded. click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 15. 8 If you want to save this exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. c_Townhouse. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 9 To play the walkthrough. for Frames/sec. If you are unsure of what option to use. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. and click Save. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. shading with edges. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. reducing the size of the image. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. for Model Graphics Style.

Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. In this tutorial. 431 . ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. More specifically.

click shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. click Training Files.Courtyard View In this exercise. 4 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). and double-click 01 Entry. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view.Creating a Solar Study . as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . A 3D view is created. click Camera.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).

5 On the Design Bar. click Save As. 8 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . 6 Click the view boundary to select it. 7 In the Project Browser. you create a section cutaway view. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. if necessary. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. right-click 3D View 1. click Modify. expand 3D Views. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. click Section. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433.Courtyard View. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. as shown. 9 On the File menu. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. enter Solar Study . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.

click Modify. double-click the section head. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. and click OK. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. (SteeringWheels). 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click Rename. click 10 On the View toolbar. as shown. click Modify. 11 On the SteeringWheel. click . Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 6 To view the section. expand Sections.

3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. 17 To hide the section box. In some cases. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. then Fine. including the house. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. under Floor Plans. click Callout. do not display many elements in 3D. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 01 Entry. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. 4 In the Project Browser. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. as shown. and click Rename. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. then select Medium. under 3D Views. and click OK. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. click . right-click {3D}. and click OK. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. click Save. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 16 On the View Control Bar. you create a plan cutaway view. On the Annotation Categories tab. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 15 In the Rename View dialog.14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. Typical plan views. 18 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. right-click Callout of 01 Entry.

11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the SteeringWheel. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click (SteeringWheels).8 On the View toolbar. as shown. 15 Select the Roof. so you can see into the building from the top. as shown. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.

20 On the View Control Bar.17 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 19 In the Rename View dialog. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . right-click {3D}. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. 21 On the File menu. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Save. and click OK. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 .

Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. Los Angeles.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. expand 3D Views. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click Duplicate. and time range. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 9 In the Name dialog. or multi-day solar study. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. MA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you specify the location. for City. For this study. date range. 10 Under Place. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. USA. leave the slider at 50. single-day. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. You can create a still. expand Views (all). click . select Los Angeles. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. For the Single-Day solar study. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 4 For Sun Position. click click OK. Click the Single-Day tab. and time. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. For the Multi-Day solar study. you specify the location.Boston.Creating Solar Studies . click . USA is selected. 3 Select Cast Shadows. CA. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter Summer Solstice. date. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study .

You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click OK. 16 In the Name dialog. 2008. Under Frame. 19 On the File menu. For Time Range. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Sun Position. and click OK. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. select Winter Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . Clear Ground Plane at Level. enter 20 and press ENTER. 2008. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. select December 22. under Frame. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. click Save. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. enter 10 and press ENTER. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles. and click OK. click OK. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. Los Angeles is selected.Courtyard View is currently displayed. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 14 In this case. click . Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . for Date. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. and click Duplicate. 6 On the View Control Bar. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. select June 22. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 8 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. ■ For Time Interval. Los Angeles. enter Winter Solstice.

Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click .rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 14 On the Options Bar. click To play the animation from start to finish. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. on the Single-Day tab. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Los Angeles. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. . 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. approximately as shown. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson.■ To display the next key frame. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. select Summer Solstice. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. The solar study animation plays. . click . double-click 01 Entry. click OK. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click Text. under Floor Plans. . Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. for Sun Position. click . you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. click To display the next sequential frame.

■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. click . On the Options Bar. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click Lines. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 8 For Sun Position. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. approximately as shown. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . as shown. as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. expand 3D Views. click . Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 6 On the View Control Bar. Click and enter Dining.

17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. select Summer Solstice. and enter 5 to 50. Los Angeles. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. On the Annotation Categories tab. select the section box. and click OK. ■ For Frames per second. and click OK. select Section Boxes. 14 Click outside of the section box.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 To display the section box. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . on the Single-Day tab. as shown. if necessary. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Output Length. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. select Frame Range. verify that the value is set to 15. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 15 To hide the section box. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK.

for Model Graphics Style. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. you open each image. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For Dimensions. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Hidden Line is selected. for Model Graphics Style. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. of the animation separately. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Format. To view the animation. and click OK. 3 For Sun Position. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. for Compressor. For File Name. select Winter Solstice. select AVI Files. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson.Los Angeles. select Frame Range. and click OK. Click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop.■ ■ Under Format. click OK. and enter 5 to 10. verify that the value is set to 15. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . on the Single-Day tab. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. enter 450 in the first field (width). under Output Length. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. For Files of Type. 2 On the View Control Bar. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. click . For Frames per second. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. or frame. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.

such as JPEG. select PNG. For File name. TIFF. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.■ For Dimensions.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. In this example. 8 Click Save. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. depending on the Frame Range. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. or GIF.Los Angeles. under 3D Views. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. click the Desktop icon. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Click OK. or any single-frame format. enter 450 in the first field (width). For Files of Type. BMP. as shown: 9 On the File menu. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . click Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown.

and on the View Control Bar. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. USA. 8 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 Select the roof. 12 In the Name dialog. for Sun Position. click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. specify 2:00 pm. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. For Time Interval. clear Section Boxes. MA. and click Duplicate. and click OK. for File name enter 2pm . select One week. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . On the Annotation Categories tab.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine.Los Angeles .Week Interval. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. For Time. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click OK.Boston. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. When you mirror a project. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. and annotations in non-drafting views. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 17 On the View Control Bar. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. for File Name. Click the Desktop icon.South. In the Length/Format dialog. you mirror all model elements. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. click OK. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. select Full Frames (Uncompressed).West or North . and click Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. for Compressor. under Floor Plans. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. model views. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. such as East . double-click 01 Entry.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis.

4 In the Mirror Project dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. select the roof. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. under 3D Views.West.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. select East .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. For additional information. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 6 On the Standard toolbar. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. Then.West axis. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 2 In the drawing area. The project is mirrored along the East . click OK. right-click. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. and click OK. 5 In the warning dialog. In this exercise.

click . on the Still tab. click . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 10 Under Date and Time. select Summer Solstice. and select Winter Solstice. click . 5 For Sun Position. and click OK. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. click the Still tab. and click OK. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For example. 8 For Sun Position. change the time back to 12:00 PM. click Apply. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM.3 On the View Control Bar. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 11 For Sun Position. Orienting to True North | 449 . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. 12 Under Date and Time.

18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the View Control Bar. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. select True North. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. click . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Winter Solstice. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. right click 01 Entry. click the Still tab. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . the view settings must be set for True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. for Orientation. click OK. and click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This process establishes the view setting to True North. 15 For Sun Position. double-click 01 Entry. and click Properties. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. and click OK. When a project is started. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. under Floor Plans.

Orienting to True North | 451 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. The floor plan rotates in the view. click toward the top of the screen. as shown. ■ To establish the new direction of True North.■ To establish the True North direction.

right-click. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. for Orientation. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select True North Orientation. enter True North Orientation. 27 In the Rename View dialog. right-click 01 Entry. for Orientation. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. select Project North. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. under 3D Views. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. click .23 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Rename. click the Still tab. and click Apply. 25 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . right-click 01 Entry. 33 For Sun Position. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Element Properties. select True North. 32 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Summer Solstice. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. and click OK.

Los Angeles. click the Desktop icon. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Click OK. for Dimensions. In the Length/Format dialog. click OK. under Format. For Files of Type. enter 600 in the first field. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. and click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. and click OK. click Summer Solstice.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. For File Name. Orienting to True North | 453 . Click Save. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click the Single-Day tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. for Compressor.

and click Duplicate. and click OK. under Quality. for Setting. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. select Interior: Sun only. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. for Date and Time.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Rendered views do not have this limitation. 1 In the Project Browser. and exporting it as a JPEG image. and 2:00 PM. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. In the Name dialog. 2 In the Project Browser. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. For Sun. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. (Show Rendering Dialog). under Settings. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select Winter Solstice. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Medium. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . capturing it. In this exercise. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. 3 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. select Edit/New. select 12/22. and click OK. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. Since a rendered image is temporary. for Scheme. click Render. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Under Lighting.

8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and click Save. For Files of type. click Save to Project. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. verify that JPEG Files is selected.6 In the Rendering dialog. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. click Export. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . enter living area_winter solstice. click Desktop. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. and click OK.

456 .

Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. Other tools in the software. In this tutorial. Whether the audience is the general contractor. or the client. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. 457 . you explore the stylistic approach. Co-house. you can choose between realism and stylistics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. a consultant. and details. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. For the realistic approach. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. type. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. They include rendering. and section boxes. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Using the pre-built building model. however. advanced model graphics. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. In this series of exercises. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. linework. length. an outside reviewer. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. When organizing presentation graphics. sections. elevations. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a presentation floor plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a copy of the plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Training Files. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. right-click 2nd Flr. under Floor Plans. exit the menu. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Cnst. click in the drawing area.

dimensions. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . sections. click the Scale control and select 1:100. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. this represents the view getting smaller. elevations.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 11 In the Save As directory. This turns off the visibility of all tags.rvt. expand the Stairs category. Down Arrow. 7 Under Visibility. and other annotations in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. 8 Click OK. and clear DOWN Text. No annotations display in the view. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. UP Text. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Save. navigate to the folder of your choice. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. and Up Arrow. Notice the immediate change in the line weights.

This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 1:00 PM. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. however. click . specify 10/27. double-click it in the Project Browser. 12 Click OK. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you can select any city. ■ For Contrast. 7 For Place. Cnst. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. At that place. 2 On the View Control Bar. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . on the Still tab. click . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 6 Under Settings. select By Date. select Boston. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK. The higher the number. Within a project. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. click OK. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. If you select a different city. the darker the shadows. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.rvt. click the Place tab. you can create. 3 On the View Control Bar. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. select Cast Shadows. modify. Time and Place. select Sun and Shadow Settings. For Sun Position. and select 1st Flr. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. click (Shadows Off). NOTE For this step. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 9 For City. MA. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 35. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. for Date and Time.

This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Shadows On).Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. for Sun Position. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. under Settings. . and click OK. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. clear Ground Plane at Level. click OK. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462.

right-click the Design Bar. and click View. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Modify. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. TIP If the View tab is not available. and notice the view title. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Arch Portrait. click Sheet. and click OK.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click to place it. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.

and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. for Show Title. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click . enter Presentation. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 9 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. For this analytique. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. select No. and click Activate View. To accomplish this. under Graphics. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.

click Region Properties.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and the boundary of the region. click Filled Region. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click Edit/New. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. select Invisible lines. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click . click . 18 On the Options Bar. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. and select Chain. 22 On the Design Bar. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. 20 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . When you finish drawing the chain. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. fill properties. If necessary.

enter Presentation. for Fill Pattern. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click OK. scroll down. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. under Identity Data. under Graphics. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466.24 In the Type Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. select Solid fill. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Solid Black. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. under Name. and click Deactivate View. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click View Properties. and click OK. click . for Sheet Name.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. right-click South.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .

scroll up. By changing the angle of the sun. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 For Contrast. specify 2:30 PM. on the Model Categories tab. click in the Walls row. click OK. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click in the drawing area. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. under Settings. exit the menu. and click OK. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . select Cast Shadows. 14 For Sun Position. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and clear Elevation Swing. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Visibility. expand the Doors category. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click Override. under Visibility. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Time and Place. click (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. right-click Copy of South. enter Presentation South Elevation. clear Visible. click Duplicate. 18 For Time. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Under Shadow. 9 Click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Elevations. select By Date. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 11 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. specify 35. under Pattern Overrides. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 16 In the Name dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view.

and click Add View to Sheet. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. click Add View.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 .Presentation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. double-click A105 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.

select Viewport : Presentation.The viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 7 On the Design Bar. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Floor Plans. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. select 1: 100.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the section shown below. click Section. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. for Scale. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Cnst.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. and use the flip arrows if necessary. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

click Callout. select 1 : 100.Section 2 is added to the building model. To accomplish this. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. for Scale. expand Sections (Callout 1). you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . and double-click Section 2. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. To fit correctly in the analytique. this view needs to be rotated 180°. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. as shown.

18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 12 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. expand the Doors category. enter Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. click in the Walls row. and click OK. scroll up. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click Callout of Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. under Sections (Callout 1). 10 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Visible. click Modify. 17 Under Visibility. click Override. and click OK. click the Model Categories tab. and clear Elevation Swing. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 15 Under Visibility. 11 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. click The crop regions no longer display. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Hide Crop Region).■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop region. 22 On the View Control Bar. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 20 Click OK. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements.

double-click Presentation Section 2. specify 35. In addition. The shadows do not offer much contrast. and click OK.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 2 On the View Control Bar. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).rvt. specify the following: Under Shadow. click Duplicate. select Cast Shadows. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. under Sections (Callout 1). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ For Sun Position. In the steps that follow. For Contrast. Click Apply. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. in the Project Browser. 6 In the Name dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.

TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. NOTE The line style. Silhouette Edges. specify 135°. for Silhouette style. For Altitude. For Azimuth. was added to this training file for training purposes. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click OK. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. select Directly. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). Click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. specify 70°. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. Select Relative to View. select Silhouette Edges.

3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. click Add View. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. and click to place the selected view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. under Sheets (all).Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

The view title no longer displays. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser.5 In the Type Selector. double-click Section 2. click (Rotate). select Viewport : Presentation. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. Using a clock as a reference. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. The section needs to be rotated 180°. click Modify. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. under Sections (Callout 1). To rotate an object. In the steps that follow. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 6 On the Design Bar. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and press Enter. 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. you click to specify the start radius.

480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all).Presentation. 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. double-click A105 .

After applying the view template to a new section view. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. 15 On the Design Bar. Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. and drag it up and to the left as shown.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify.

you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. double-click Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 1. 4 In the View Templates dialog. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Copy of Section 1. enter Presentation. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. 3 In the New View Template dialog.rvt. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 6 In the Project Browser. click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. 7 In the Rename View dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click OK.

you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and click Add View to Sheet. select Presentation. 15 Right-click the viewport. for Rotation on Sheet. select Section: Presentation Section 1. click Add View. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and elevation swings no longer display. lighting fixtures. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. select 90° Counterclockwise. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Deactivate View.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click Activate View. 14 In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 12 In the Views dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Viewport : Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . under Graphics.Presentation. annotations. The furniture. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click OK. under Names. and click OK.

traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

and click Rename. click Modify. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head.rvt. double-click Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 1. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. select the callout. click Callout. 4 In the Project Browser. as shown.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .

5 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click View Properties. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). under Extents. clear Annotation Crop. enter Presentation Callout. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 7 Select the crop region. as shown.

double-click A105 . Click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Add View. For Scale Value 1. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Sheets (all). select Viewport : Presentation. do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. select Custom. specify 22. click Modify. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. 12 In the Views dialog. and click Activate View. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet.

488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. activate the viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and move it to the position shown below. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Deactivate View. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. and make adjustments as necessary. When finished. click Filled Region. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Edit/New. click Region Properties.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. In the steps that follow. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Filled Region.Presentation. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. double-click A105 . click Finish Sketch. and click OK 3 times.25 In the Type Properties dialog. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. under Sheets (all). on the Design Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click . for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. When you are finished. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.

32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the crop region. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Show Crop Region). and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click .31 On the Options Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. 33 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). and click Deactivate View.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. under 3D Views. and click 1 : 200. 5 On the View Control Bar. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click Isometric. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click (Shadows Off). 3 On the View Control Bar. and apply shadows to the views. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Scale control. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

specify 35. Click OK. and click Rename. under 3D Views. and click OK.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Isometric 2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. under 3D Views. For Contrast. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Cast Shadows. specify 45°. Cnst. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Azimuth. click Duplicate. for Silhouette style. For Altitude. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under 3D Views. select Silhouette Edges. under 3D Views. click . select Section Box. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . Select Relative to View. in the list. right-click Isometric 1. Select 1st Flr. right-click Isometric. and click OK. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 8 In the Name dialog. A section box displays around the building model. select Directly. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. specify 135°. enter Isometric 1. 12 In the Rename View dialog. under Extents. Select Ground Plane at Level. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click OK. double-click Isometric 2. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 13 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify on the Design Bar. Grips display on each face of the section box. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. When you are finished. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown. You can use this to rotate the section box.

NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views. On the Annotation Categories tab. make a copy of the view. you can adjust the plane location. under 3D Views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 24 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. enter Isometric 3. double-click A105 . clear Section Boxes. double-click Isometric 2. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. 25 To hide the section box. select Viewport : Presentation. double-click Isometric 3. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Rename. under 3D Views. under Sheets (all). 29 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. 31 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. under 3D Views. If desired. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the stairs and railings may display. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK.Presentation. 22 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . Next. and click OK. under 3D Views. 27 Select the section box. On the Annotation Categories tab.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. When you are finished. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. In the Type Selector. click Modify on the Design Bar. The section box no longer displays.

select Viewport : Presentation. In the Type Selector. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views.32 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 33 In the Project Browser. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.

and click Activate View. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. The image below shows the redrawn lines. 42 Using the drawing tools. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Edit/New. 35 Select the poche filled region. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . click Lines. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. for Fill Patterns. 39 For Background. 36 On the Design Bar. click Edit. On the Options Bar. select Concrete. click Region Properties. select Transparent. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. 41 On the Design Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

click Finish Sketch. click Edit/New. 47 On the Design Bar.43 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. and click Deactivate View. for Fill Pattern. 46 Click OK twice. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. select Solid fill.

a cutaway perspective view. then you specify the eye direction and range. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. double-click 1st Flr. under Floor Plans. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . Cnst. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. The view opens immediately. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create the final view for the analytique.

specify 35. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify the following: Under Shadow. 6 On the View Control Bar. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Silhouette style. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click OK. click . For Contrast. for Name. For Sun Position. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. Grips display on each plane of the section box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. and click OK.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. A section box now cuts through the building model. select Section Box. 12 Select the section box.

On the Annotation Categories tab. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. and click OK. 19 To hide the section box. 17 Under Model Crop Size. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 18 On the View Control Bar. under Change.Presentation. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. In the Type Selector. double-click A105 . enter 165 mm. click (Hide Crop Region). you must specify the actual size of the image. select Viewport : Presentation. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser.14 Select the crop region. clear Section Boxes. 15 On the Options Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. click Size. for Width. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Description. click Duplicate. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.Presentation sheet is not the active view. and click OK. under Text. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. double-click it in the Project Browser. under Text. click . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Text. 3 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. click Edit/New. click OK. and click OK. select a font. specify a text size of 6 mm. enter Title. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Text : Title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. 6 In the Name dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. 10 In the Name dialog.

select Text : Description. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 16 In the Type Selector.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Modify. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 18 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

that compose the building. In this tutorial. and roofs. you can easily add detail with Revit components. 507 . Once the model has been imported. After you import the SketchUp model. such as walls.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. you create a small building from the front mass form. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. curtain walls.

and click OK. Double-click the Common folder. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Browse. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 9 In the informational dialog. enter SketchUp Model. click OK. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. click OK. For Files of type. select Preserve. click Training Files. select Auto-Detect. 4 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. you create a Revit Architecture project. For Colors. under Template file. click the Massing tab. select All.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. Click the Sketchup file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. enter Import SketchUp. visible elements. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. select SketchUp Files. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. and not in the library.skp. buildings.rte. and click Save. for File name. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. or select from a list. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. click Create Mass. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog. For Import units. For Layers. right-click in the Design Bar.

depending on the complexity of the project.Center. Level 1 is the only choice. click Finish Mass. For Place at level. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. select Manual . such as walls. 17 In the warning dialog. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click . 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. click the Close button. and roofs. ■ ■ For Positioning. select Level 1. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . 14 On the View toolbar. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. In a new project. curtain walls. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. Click Open.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 16 On the Design Bar.

5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Level 2 is selected. After you create the building from the mass faces. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. verify Basic Roof: Generic . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 4 On the Options Bar. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project.18 Proceed to the next exercise. select the face so that it highlights in red. for Level. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Roof by Face.400mm displays. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. such as walls. that compose the building. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. 3 In the Type Selector. and on the View Control Bar. and roofs. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. curtain walls.

indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. A roof is created from the mass face. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Create Roof. on the Options Bar. click to display masses. 9 On the Options Bar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . To see the new roof. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. on the View toolbar. click Create Roof. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.

click Roof by Face. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. select Core Face: Exterior. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. verify Basic Wall: Generic . Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 22 In the Type Selector.200mm displays. click Wall by Face.15 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. for Loc Line. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . click roofs that you created.

26 Click to redisplay the masses. 25 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System by Face. 28 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. click to view only the walls and roofs. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below.

click Create System. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 31 Using the same technique. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. create the 2 curtain systems shown below.30 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms.

38 Select the mass face shown below. and on the Options Bar. click Create Roof. select the other wall. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall.35 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. click Create System. click Roof by Face. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. click Curtain System. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and select it. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below.

43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. click Camera. specify a point to place the camera. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 .Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. click to view the building that you have created. 42 On the View toolbar. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. Below the right corner of the view. and select the mass face shown below. double-click Level 1.

click your building in the view. 48 On the View toolbar. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. to view only the walls. The perspective view created by the camera displays. Click the frame to display its grips. as shown. roofs. specify a point for the camera target. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display.

Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 2 Pattern. 50 On the Options Bar. Under Grid 1 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. for Justification. click Modify. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. click . Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . select Center. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Center. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. Click OK.

double-click {3D}. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the roof edges as shown below. and click Cancel to end the command. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 63 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . double-click 3D View 1. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 59 On the View toolbar. click Door. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 55 Right-click. 56 In the Project Browser.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building.

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. click Training Files. Like windows. you need to change the length of the wall. To switch panel types. you create a curtain system using the wall command. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and they are not windows. 525 . and mullions. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Like walls. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you select the grid. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This affects the entire curtain system. Unlike windows. to resize the system. you need to select a panel. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. panel. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. To change grids. For example. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you can change these elements individually.rvt. grid lines.

1 In the Project Browser. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 4 In the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Wall.

8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added.

Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. For Top Offset. top and base attachments. top constraint. using curtain grids. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. and room bounding. and click (Properties).11 Select the curtain system. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Click OK. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . enter 1200.

18 In the Project Browser. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. click Modify. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 25 On the Design Bar. click Elevation. under Floor Plans. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.a. and click Rename. click Curtain Grid. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. right-click Elevation 1 . Creating an Entrance | 529 . 20 In the drawing area. and click OK.

FOURTH FLOOR. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. one larger than the other. Click to create a vertical grid. SIXTH FLOOR. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 29 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. select SECOND FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 33 On the Design Bar. while pressing CTRL. FIFTH FLOOR. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.26 While pressing CTRL. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. THIRD FLOOR. click Modify. Click to place another grid line. click Curtain Grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. and SEVENTH FLOOR.

and on the Options Bar. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. The two segments are removed. and then select the segment above it. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. click Add or Remove Segments. Creating an Entrance | 531 . 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them.Next. The segment line style changes to dashed.

click Curtain Grid. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 42 Place dimensions as shown. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 39 On the Design Bar. and lock them. select One Segment. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method.

46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Creating an Entrance | 533 . Use the following image as a guide. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click in any white space to exit the editor. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 43 Delete the dimensions. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.

click Training Files. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The panel changes to a double door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. 56 In the Project Browser. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. double-click Entrance Elevation. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. under Floor Plans. and click Wireframe. . 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. not as curtain panels. They are part of the curtain panel category. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. You will have to press TAB to highlight it.Next. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. These panels schedule as doors. 55 In the Project Browser. This changes the graphics style of the Next. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click view. under Elevations. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. Now. on the new curtain system you added. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 52 On the Type Selector. 57 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 54 On the Design Bar.

The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click . 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. The glazed panels display in blue. 61 With the panel still selected. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 63 Click OK twice. 65 On the View Control Bar. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. and the solid panels display in white. click System Panel : Solid.60 On the Type Selector. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel.

536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. select Entire Grid Line. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. select Grid Line Segment.rvt. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.68 On the File menu. click Save As. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. click Mullion. 2 On the Options Bar.

there are a few that you do not want. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. because their width reduces the size of the doors.6 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. You are going to change some mullion joins. however. 10 Delete the mullions below them. select All Empty Segments. so you remove them next. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. clickModify.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 14 Click the top mullion control. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.Two mullion join controls display. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. you can also right-click. 16 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 15 On the Design Bar. Finally. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 17 Save the file.

1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. enter 1200. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. double-click GROUND FLOOR. for Top Constraint. you add a curtain system using the wall command. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. Curved Curtain System | 539 . Finally. 7 On the Options Bar. (Arc passing through three points). click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. For Top Offset. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. under Floor Plans. click Wall.

The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. click Curtain Grid. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. under Elevations. and then sixteenths. 14 In the Project Browser. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. you place grids on the system. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. Next. double-click East. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You are going to use one of these snaps points. eighths. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. select Basic Wall: Generic . Next. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. to filter out all 19 Save the file.

1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. double-click Exterior. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. and click OK. . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 9 Select the extrusion. click Training Files. select Glass. enter 100. and click . 12 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. click . click Model Lines.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rft. 11 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. for Depth. clear Chain. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 5 On the Design Bar. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 6 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection.

20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. right-click.Pattern. and return to the project file.rfa. click 25 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.14 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector.Pattern. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. and save the family as Curtain Panel . click Modify.rfa family. 19 In the Project Browser. All fourth floor panels are selected. and click Change Walls Orientation. 23 Right-click. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. select Curtain Panel . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 18 Load the Curtain Panel . under Floor Plans. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 24 On the View toolbar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click (Default 3D View). 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall.Pattern.

Solid. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . right-click. 30 Save the file. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 29 In the Type Selector. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fifth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. select System Panel . double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 27 In the Project Browser.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All the panels change to the solid panel.

Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. Select Radius. For vertical mullions. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). click Lines. and enter 50 mm for the radius. select Mullion. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. for Profile Usage. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 1 In the Project Browser. Click again to specify the ending point. double-click East. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile.rft. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. . If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. and click OK. and select it. click ■ ■ For Sides. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. under Elevations. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. enter 8. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . click Mullion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. 8 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views.rfa family. 19 On the Design Bar. and return to the project file. click Detail Component. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click (SteeringWheels).rfa. 20 Select the detail component. double-click Southeast Isometric. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. click Modify. clear Coarse and Medium. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. it can be added as a mullion type. click Visibility. click Modify.rfa. click Mullion. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 28 On the View toolbar.11 On the Design Bar.detail. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. and click Visibility. After the new profile is loaded. and click OK. 31 Click . clear Fine. click Training Files. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. and click OK.

click Duplicate. You have placed more mullions than you want. 37 Click OK twice. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 41 In the Project Browser. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK. under Floor Plans. select Circular Mullion for Family. so you remove the unwanted ones. click Modify. 38 On the Options Bar. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. select All Empty Segments. 36 Under Construction. 43 Press DELETE. 40 On the Design Bar. 33 Click Edit/New. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. right-click. 44 Save the file. for Profile. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc.

make custom curtain panels and mullions. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you learned to create a curved curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. click Pick Walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. a storefront system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. All the inside faces highlight. and you can click to select them all. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 5 On the Options Bar.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. TIP To chain select all the walls. and a ruled curtain system. and press TAB. select Defines slope. In this lesson.

select Entire Grid Line. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 14 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 17 On the View Control Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Modify. Click OK. click Finish Roof. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 18 Save the file. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. under 3D Views. click Roof Properties. enter 600. click Mullion. 10 In the Project Browser.7 On the Design Bar.

click Wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.Storefront System In this exercise. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. and enter 2400. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Unconnected for Height.

9 On the Design Bar. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. For this wall. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. which is specified in the type. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. click Edit/New. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. enter 10200 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. Storefront System | 551 . double-click Southeast Isometric. even if the wall height changes. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. and click . To see how the grid layout is defined. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. click Modify.

center. or end. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Justification. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. Angle. 18 On the Options Bar. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. see the Revit Architecture help. 16 Click OK. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 19 Select a curtain grid. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. select All Empty Segments. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. you find Number. and Offset. In this exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 1 In the Project Browser. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. click Mullion. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 20 Save the file. under 3D Views. By setting the Angle value. enter 15. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click Southeast Isometric.

Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 553 .3 On the View Control Bar. and highlight the model line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

Next. and click . A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system.8 Select the highlighted line. click Modify. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 10 Select the panel. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid.

and define a ruled curtain system. 16 In the Type Selector. right-click. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and then eighths.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. quarters. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. select System Panel : Solid. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 18 Save the file. and then eighths. Finally. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. quarters. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system.

556 .

click Training Files. 557 . and open Metric\m_Roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. In this lesson. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.Roofs 15 In this lesson. mansard. Before you can sketch the roof profile. you learn to create several different types of roofs. gable. and soffits to the roofs that you create. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. including hip.rvt. In this exercise. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In addition. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this tutorial. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and low sloped roofs. shed. gutters. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and so on). click the blue square on the witness line. click Ref Plane. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. expand Views (all). 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. select Name. 4 Click OK. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and click OK. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. centerline.1 In the Project Browser. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face.

15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Chain.Next. 16 On the View toolbar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar.

use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 21 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 18 Select the edge of the roof. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 17 On the Tools toolbar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. click Modify. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. expand Sections (Type 1). Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . press TAB. and double-click Section 1. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. press CTRL. 19 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and select the second wall. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. Next.

you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click model.24 On the Options Bar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . Next. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.rvt. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and enter 600 for Overhang. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). and click Yes. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. sketch the roof footprint. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Garage Roof. m_Roofs.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

clear Defines slope. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Next. and click OK. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. By default. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click Modify. click the model. and on the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. under Dimensions. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). 11 Press CTRL.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 14 When you see the informational dialog. click Finish Roof. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select both slope definition lines. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run.

the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. m_Roofs. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 3 On the Options Bar. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. press TAB. and enter 600 for Overhang. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and double-click Level 3. expand Views (all). When you complete the roof. clear Defines slope.

click Finish Roof. 15 On the Options bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. select Defines Slope. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. add new slope lines to the roof. click Modify. click Lines. 9 Using automatic snaps. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click (Rectangle). sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 10 On the View menu.6 Click to select all the walls. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. Next. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. Next. sketch the chimney opening.

click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).18 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . select Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567.rvt. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend). The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 7 On the Options Bar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 11 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click Lines. Next. clear Defines Slope. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. using the following illustration for guidance. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools toolbar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. select the left vertical slope definition line.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. and click (Pick Lines). close the roof sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next.

click (SteeringWheels).) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 16 On the View toolbar. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . click Finish Roof. click Modify. 17 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 Under Constraints.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click Roof Properties. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. and click OK. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level.

21 Click (SteeringWheels). Next. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. click (Join/Unjoin Roof).

3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and double-click Level 2. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Walls. press TAB. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. enter 0 for Overhang. 6 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. clear Defines Slope. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 8 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical roof line.rvt. expand Views (all). Next. 1 In the Project Browser. 10 To trim the first line segment. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 9 On the Options Bar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and enter 300 for Overhang.

m_Roofs. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. (SteeringWheels).11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 1 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. and click OK. and press ENTER. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 13 On the Options Bar. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views (all). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 19 On the View toolbar. 16 Under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise.rvt. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. expand 3D Views. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you add a slope-defining line. click Modify. click 20 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Roof Properties.

click Slope Arrow. expand Floor Plans. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). verify ■ (Draw) is selected.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. Next. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Before you can add slope arrows. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. To help locate the position of each split. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . click Modify. clear Defines Slope. click (Pick Lines). 9 On the Tools menu. and double-click Level 2. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. and enter 600 for Offset. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Next. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Split Walls and Lines. 5 On the View menu. add two new slope arrows. you need to add two reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Ref Plane. 12 On the Options Bar.

click Edit. (Properties). select both slope arrows.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 3 On the Options Bar. select Slope for Specify. and double-click Garage Roof. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. m_Roofs. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574.rvt. click Modify. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. When eave heights differ. 18 Press CTRL. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 1 In the Project Browser. and move the cursor to place the arrow. expand Floor Plans. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.15 to add the second slope arrow. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 16 Repeat steps 13 . Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and then click OK. and click 19 Under Constraints. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Views (all). you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. the adjacent eave heights must align. 20 Under Dimensions. When you sketch a hip roof. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.

15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. Next. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. When aligning eaves. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 14 If you want to save your changes. select Defines Slope. select a method to align the eaves. on the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Dimensions. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Align Eaves. 5 On the Options Bar. on the File menu. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. 13 On the View toolbar. (Properties).

and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. and double-click North. under Constraints. click Modify. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. on the Options Bar. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. (Properties). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

10 On the Options Bar. click Lines. expand Floor Plans. under Dimensions. and then select Defines slope. and double-click Level 3. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof.6 On the View toolbar. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines). and select the remaining three lines. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click Modify. Next. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. expand Views (all). and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 7 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Roof.

you add a roof to a building shell. click Save As. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.17 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click mansard roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Training Files. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. After you add the roof.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof.

click Pick Walls. verify that Defines slope is not selected. double-click Roof. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 4 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. for Type.EPDM. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Insulation on Metal Deck . click Roof Properties. select Steel Truss .Because the walls are not continuous. and click OK. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click (Trim/Extend). Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.

In the next steps. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. click (Draw Split Lines). double-click the section head to open the section view.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. and click to select it. The roof has been created. 16 On the Options Bar. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. double-click Roof. under Floor Plans.

582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and select a point on the opposite roof line.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. 18 Move the cursor down. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 20 Using the same method. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.

23 On the Options Bar. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . on the Options Bar.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. (Add points). exact placement of the points is not important. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. click (Modify Sub-Elements). You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. You modify the points individually. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Next. In this exercise.

584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . enter -2''. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. for the dimension. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. and press ENTER. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. 25 Using the same method. click (Modify Sub-Elements).

for Elevation. and press ENTER. including the interior edges of the roof regions.27 Press and hold CTRL. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click (Properties). as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and on the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. enter 4''. and select all of the roof edges.

you can easily create its fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. The entire slab is sloped. 35 Click OK 3 times. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Edit. under Construction. and Soffits In this lesson. After you create a roof. 36 View the results in the section view. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . gutters. Gutters. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. click Edit/New. Creating Fascia. Creating Fascia. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and soffits in Revit Architecture. Gutters. for Structure. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. for the Thermal/Air Layer. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. gutters.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. click Save As. on the File menu. 37 If you want to save your changes. select Variable. In some cases this type of slope is desired. and Soffits on page 586. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. and soffits. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Built-up Fascia. 3 Press CTRL. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . click Duplicate. and click OK twice.rvt. and click Open.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. under Construction.rfa. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Training Files. click (Properties). and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. 8 In the Name dialog.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar.

13 On the Design Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Gutters on page 588. c_Condominium. click (Properties). click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.rvt. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 2 On the Options Bar.

3 In the Properties dialog. under Construction. 10 Click to place the gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK three times. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click Duplicate. and click OK. Creating Soffits on page 590. click in the Value field for Material. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. Creating Gutters | 589 . click Edit/New. .

590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. and double-click Roof.Creating Soffits In this exercise. expand Views. click Pick Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt.

and double-click 3D. click Join Geometry. 5 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 7 On the Tools menu.4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. and then select the soffit to join them. 6 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. Creating Soffits | 591 . 8 Select the roof.

9 If you want to save your changes. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. on the File menu.

Click OK. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. your values will be different. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click Project Units. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. In the final exercise. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.rvt. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select mm. 593 . Finally. and open Common\c_Area. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. select Millimeters. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. select Square meters. 3 Under Area. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. For Unit Suffix. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. If you are using metric units. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. under Length. click Training Files.

Click OK. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. it is not necessary in this exercise. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click the Room Calculations tab. click OK.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. For Unit Suffix. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Units dialog. click Settings. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. These schemes define spatial relationships. 9 Click Cancel. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. the system-computed height defaults to the level. or 0. expand Floor Plans. select m2. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and click Room and Area. click the Area Schemes tab. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. select 2 decimal places. right-click in the Design Bar. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.

The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. 12 When the informational dialog displays. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. you must select one of the reference lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click Area. forming a closed loop. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. you must manually add these boundary lines. If you select No. To modify the area. click Area Plan. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. under Views (all). NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 13 In the Project Browser. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. rather than the area tag. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building).Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Click OK.

If you do not select this option. When you add area boundary lines. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable).NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area Plan. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. When you pick the walls. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Next. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area Boundary. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. common areas. and store area. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. Click OK. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall.

place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 25 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. 27 On the Options Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify.23 On the Design Bar. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . click Area. and click to select the area. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click ■ ■ .

Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. In the Element Properties dialog. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 31 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. Select Office area for Area Type.■ Click OK. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. click Area.

35 Add an area to the building model core. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. enter Core for Name. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.■ Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type.

Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.Notice that within the two store areas. and click to place the legend. In the next exercise. name the project Area-in progress. click Color Scheme Legend. In this exercise. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. and click Save. 37 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.

Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Areas (Rentable).3 When the dialog displays. 7 Under Available fields. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click the Fields tab. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. and click OK. under Category. select Area Type and click Add.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. or both. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. building elements. and floors. floors. In this tutorial. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you make building elements. You assign the default wall. At any time. you then need to update the building face. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. curtain systems. you can specify the view to display massing elements. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. If you modify a massing face. After creating mass floors. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. and roofs. floor. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. and perimeter information. volume. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. 603 . you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. roofs. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. under Views (all). you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. under Floor Plans.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Create Mass. sweeps. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and cutting geometry. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Massing. double-click Level 1.

16 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Opaque). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click the value for Material. 8 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. for Name. and click . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. and click OK. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 12 On the Design Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. click Lines. and click OK. (Line). for Offset. 15 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click (Default 3D View). 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. enter 25000. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . click Extrusion Properties. click Finish Sketch. (Pick Lines). click 18 On the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Lines. under Constraints. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Materials and Finishes. enter 1550 mm. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Views (all). and on the Options Bar.

24 In the Element Properties dialog. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . The second form is on top of the first form. highlight the larger form. and click OK. under Constraints. click Extrusion Properties.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 23 In the Materials dialog. enter 25000. press TAB to highlight the entire face. under Materials and Finishes. and click . double-click {3D} to see the results. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. click Finish Sketch. for Extrusion End. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. under Views (all). double-click West. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 In the drawing area. for Extrusion Start. 26 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter 27500. click the value for Material. TIP If necessary. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent). select Pick a plane. for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 25 On the Design Bar. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser.

and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). click Lines. Next. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. and click to select the line start point. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. (Pick Lines). 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. click (Arc passing through three points).31 Click to select the face. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. and clear Chain. 34 On the Options Bar. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 .

46 On the Design Bar. (Line). click Edit Top. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 45 In the Project Browser. click the arrow next to the drawing options. double-click East. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click Modify. on the Options Bar.TIP If you do not see this option. click (Move). 41 On the Edit toolbar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. and delete the vertical construction line. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Elevations (Building Elevation). Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. under Views (all).

54 Proceed to the next exercise.48 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . 51 In the Element Properties dialog. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 53 On the View toolbar. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. (Arc passing through three points). verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. 52 On the Design Bar. In this exercise. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). for Material. click Blend Properties. In the next exercise. click 49 Create an arc as shown. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 50 On the Design Bar.

under Views (all). double-click Level 1. and select Chain. as shown. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 2 In the drawing area. select the mass. under Floor Plans. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 10 On the Options Bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click Lines. 4 On the Options bar. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . 7 Using the same technique. click Ref Plane. m_Massing_Start. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset.rvt. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 9 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Line).

The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. for Extrusion End. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. 14 Under Constraints. click (Default 3D View). Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Click OK. on the View Control Bar. click Extrusion Properties. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. enter 0. snap the corners to the intersections. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. In this exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. When sketching each extrusion. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 17 On the View toolbar.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap.

3 On the Design Bar. select a point below the mass elements.rvt. click Sketch 2D Path. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. m_Massing_Start. and click Lines. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing .NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. ■ For the radius. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points).

Using Swept Blends | 613 . click (Default 3D View). The only way to align these elements is visually. click Finish Path. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. click Profile 1. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 8 On the Design Bar. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. 10 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click (Rectangle). 11 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Edit. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend.

as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Align). 15 On the Design Bar.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. click Profile 2. 17 Using the same method. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. and press ESC. click Finish Profile. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar.

and click . Using Swept Blends | 615 . Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. click Swept Blend Properties. 22 Click OK twice. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. click <By Category>. select Mass (Transparent). click Finish Swept Blend. 21 In the Materials dialog.

24 On the Design Bar. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. In this exercise. you create new family types from a mass family file. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Finally. click Finish Mass.

for Height. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. enter 18000 mm. enter 68000 mm. for Depth. and for Name. enter 18000 mm. enter 46000mm. enter 6000 mm. and click OK. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 7 Click New. under Other. click Training Files. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 9 Click OK. and click OK. for Width. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 15000mm. enter 12000 mm. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Depth. and click Apply.rfa. and for Name. for Height. and click Apply.rfa. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 6 For Width. In this exercise. for Depth. enter 9000 mm. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. 8 For Width. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Family Types. and click Apply. for Height. enter 11000 mm. 5 Click New. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. click New. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 .

double-click Site. Arc Dome. Semi Barrel Vault. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. You also load other existing mass families and place them.rfa. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. and Triangle. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 3 On the View Control Bar.rfa. under Floor Plans. click Place Mass. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. on the View toolbar. 6 Open the Box-Training. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.rvt. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing .Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Training Files. under Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 8 In the Type Selector. as shown. click Training Files. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa family files. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 1 If not already selected.

and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. 23 On the Options Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . and click to place the mass. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and click OK twice. 25 In the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). select Rotate after placement. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. specify Mass (Opaque). enter 90 for Angle. 11 Select the box. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. select the 3 boxes. 16 On the Design Bar.10 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. 17 Press CTRL. click (Element Properties). click Modify. as shown. for the Material parameter. and on the Options Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select the triangle. and click OK twice.

specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.26 Select the triangle. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. click (Default 3D View). click Place Mass. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . for the Material parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). 33 On the View toolbar. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. specify Mass (Transparent). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter.

NOTE When you join geometry.rvt file. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View).Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. (Join Geometry). the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you join these mass elements. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. In the next exercise. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . In this exercise.

under Views (all). 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . on the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.

as shown. click (Draw). click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Default 3D View). Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.8 On the Options Bar. 17 Press ESC to see the result. enter SM. (Join Geometry). 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. for Axis. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. and then select the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.

click (Add to Design Option Set). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. do not clear the check mark. you joined mass elements together. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise.rvt. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. and select the triangle mass element. 1 On the Design Bar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. (If Design Options is already selected. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. click Modify. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.In this exercise. 2 On the Window menu. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.

clear Curved. 14 In the drawing area. click Modify. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 17 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click Place Mass. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. specify Mass (Transparent). 13 On the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 5 In the Project Browser. select Sloped (primary). TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. under Views (all). and click OK. click Place Mass. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. for Angle. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 .4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. double-click Site. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. 10 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. 8 On the Options Bar. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. under Floor Plans. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. enter 90.

select the three arc domes. 19 On the Design Bar. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. under 3D Views. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. TIP To find the correct shapes. under Elevations. under Views (all). and watch the status bar. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. for the Material parameter. click Modify. clear Sloped. 20 In the drawing area. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK. double-click {3D}. and click OK twice. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. double-click North. and click (Element Properties). specify Mass (Transparent). While pressing CTRL. 22 In the Project Browser. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Curved. click (Add to Design Option Set). under Views (all). move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 23 On the View Control Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.

30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Option. 31 Click the value for Design Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click the Design Options tab.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. In this exercise. and click Close. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. 35 On the File menu. select Curved from the Design Option menu. and click OK. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . click (Design Options). You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 33 In the Design Options dialog. you can make it the primary option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. 34 Close the warning that displays. select Curved and. you placed mass elements into Design Options. click Make Primary.rvt.

you pick massing faces to create walls.Brick on CMU. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Pick Faces). click Wall by Face. under Views (all).Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and for Loc Line. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. select Wall Centerline. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . 6 On the Options Bar. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. 2 On the View toolbar.

under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. 11 In the Project Browser.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. double-click Level 1. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. under Views (all). 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . click Wall by Face.

under Views (all). 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 20 On the View Control Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 19 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. If desired.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 21 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 9. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing .

and Walls. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. When you select levels.In this exercise. Curtain Systems. under Views (all). and exterior surface area. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . perimeter. and click OK. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. double-click {3D}. select all levels. clear Curtain Panels. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 8 On the Design Bar. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 4 Click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. click Modify. click Mass Floors.rvt. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. volume. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 1 In the Project Browser. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.

and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. 10 Press CTRL. click Mass Floors. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. click Modify.

select Level 1.14 On the Options Bar. click Mass Floors. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. and click OK. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 .

3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Available fields. The Floor Area. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Floor Volume. and select Level. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order).rvt. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Mass Floor. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. and click Add. under Category. press and hold SHIFT. select Floor Area. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . Floor Perimeter. 4 Using the same method. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. and click OK. schedules can be created using the mass floors.In this exercise.

enter Retail. and click OK. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Usage. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. for Sort by. select Mass: Family and Type.

13 With Usage selected. and click Remove. click Edit. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. for Fields. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing .Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. After you assign usage. select Mass: Family and Type. 14 Select Level. expand Schedules/Quantities. under Scheduled fields (in order). under Other. and click Properties. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Level. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. for Field formatting. 18 On the Filter tab. and click OK. enter Hotel. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. select Usage. for Filter. 24 In the Project Browser. for Then by. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. 23 In the Rename View dialog. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. and plan views. and select Grand totals. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. for Filter.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. select Calculate totals. and click OK. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. for Sort by. under Fields. 27 Click OK twice. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . select Floor Area. and in the field below. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. elevation. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. for Filter by. and click Properties. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Formatting tab. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. in the field under Filter by. select Usage. click Edit. and click Rename. under Other.

by level. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created mass floor schedules.In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all). and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. The mass floor schedules list.rvt. double-click {3D}. click Roof by Face. floor perimeter. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. the floor area. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown.400mm. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create Roof.4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. select Basic Roof : Generic .

10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. select Sloped Glazing. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. click Create Roof. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. in the Type Selector. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. Curtain Systems. 13 Using the same method. In this exercise. select Curtain Panels. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created roofs by picking faces of massing families.8 Using the method you just learned. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast.

click Create System.rvt. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Press CTRL.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. double-click {3D}. click Curtain System by Face. 6 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown.

create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected.

10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.9 On the Options Bar. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 11 Using the same method. click Create System.

Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. you change the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command.

and Walls. enter 30000. 6 On the Design Bar. clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. Curtain Systems. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. under Views (all). for Width. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . click Modify. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. clear Exclude Design Options. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Floors. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans.1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Next. and click (Element Properties). and then click OK. double-click Site. 2 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Roofs.

double-click Level 1. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing . The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. In the next steps. under Floor Plans.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 12 On the View Control Bar.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . 14 On the Options Bar. click Remake. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. you want to select the smaller one. click OK. 17 Select the roof as shown. click (Default 3D View). press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. Also.TIP To select the curtain wall.

and click Remake. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .18 On the Options Bar. click Remake.

Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. In this exercise. you changed the size of an existing mass family. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . 1 Open the 3D view. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing.rvt. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar.20 In the Project Browser.

The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing .Massing only. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 Select Mass. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. under 3D Views. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click {3D}. click All to select all categories. 4 Rename the view 3D . 8 Click None to clear the selection.

If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. You might create the model shown. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . to the building shell.In this exercise.

652 .

you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. You mirror one instance of the group. When you make changes to a nested group. Modifying. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. 653 . You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. Creating. or with those working on a different project. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. you add the new model group to a previously created group. all instances in the building model are updated.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you not only simplify their placement. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. and modify repetitive units. you also simplify the modification process. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. After you create a model group. For example. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and typical office layouts. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. You can also nest groups within other groups. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. In another exercise. In this exercise. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. By grouping objects. hotel rooms. the host group is also updated automatically. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this tutorial. place. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise.

expand Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. 2 Click in the drawing area. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Training Files. and double-click First Floor. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand Views (all).

click (Group). enter Typical Kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen.

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin. 7 On the Design Bar.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

and click Create Instance. click Modify. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. right-click Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 12 On the Design Bar.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. expand Model.

14 On the Edit toolbar. click (Mirror). NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection.

and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 .17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. click (Rotate).

660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Modify. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and one rotated. one mirrored. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images.

click Save As. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. and click to select it. you make changes to an instance of a group. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group In this exercise.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. When you finish editing.rvt. press TAB to highlight the wall. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 661 . Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.rvt. and click Save.

press TAB. 8 On the Design Bar.3 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. press TAB. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click to select the wall.). and click to select the door.). 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. and click member to group instance.). select the element. NOTE To display an excluded element. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify.

10 In the Type Selector. move the cursor to the left. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. select Basic Wall : Generic . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. click Door. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. Modifying a Group | 663 . 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.127mm. click Wall. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Tag on Placement.

664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 23 In the drawing area. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.17 On the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. move the cursor up. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. In edit group mode. All other elements in the model are grayed out. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

click Modify. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. (Element Properties). enter 1000. Nesting Groups In this exercise. for Unconnected Height. Nesting Groups | 665 . All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. and click OK. created in an earlier lesson. enter 2134. click Finish. and on the Options Bar. click 28 For Base Offset. 26 Select the opening.25 On the Design Bar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 29 On the group editor toolbar. which acts as the host. under Constraints. you add the Typical Kitchen group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.

666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . in the Project Browser.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. under Floor Plans. click (Add to Group). double-click First Floor. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 On the group editor toolbar. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 5 In the drawing area.rvt.

double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 667 . 7 On the group editor toolbar.6 Press TAB. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors. 8 In the Project Browser. and each of the bifold doors. click Finish.

In the next exercise. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and filled regions. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add door tags to a group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. such as door and window tags. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. double-click First Floor. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. such as text. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. under Floor Plans.

5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Filled Region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. click to draw a rectangular region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. and select a point below the left elevator.

click (Group). click Modify. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. and select the text note and the filled region.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the drawing area. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. click to add an arc leader. 12 Enter Tile. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Design Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and click OK. click Text.

24 Click File menu ➤ Save.18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. 22 On the Design Bar. double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. 21 In the drawing area. expand Detail. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. under Groups. and click Create Instance. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. Because the detail group contains variables. 20 In the Project Browser. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group.

click Modify.manner that a drawing component can be added. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 3 On the Options Bar. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. clear Leader. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. 5 On the Design Bar. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . double-click First Floor. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. under Floor Plans. click Tag ➤ By Category.

Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser.7 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . click Check None. click (Group). select Door Tags. double-click Second Floor. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. and click OK. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. 9 On the Edit toolbar.

click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. therefore. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Place Detail. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . When you load the group from the library into a new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). click Modify. accept the default template file. and click OK. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. A warning dialog displays. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. and click Save. and click Save Group. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. verify that Project is selected. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. In this case. 5 In the New Project dialog. for Create new. under Groups\Model. verify that Same as group name is selected. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 3 For File name. click Desktop. 12 On the Design Bar.rvt. click OK. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. and click Open. and expand Model. expand Groups. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. browse to the Desktop. select 2 Bedroom Unit.

The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Use Existing. select the linked Revit model. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Bind. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Revit Links. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Remove Link. click Modify. 20 On the Options Bar. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. click Training Files. 24 In the message dialog. click Link. click OK. and click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 18 In the Project Browser. and the link is removed. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. When a group is converted to a link.rvt. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog.rvt file is added as a link to the project. and on the Options Bar. 23 In the confirmation dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. verify that Attached Details is selected only.

and then modify the data. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. convert the data to a table. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. islands. 677 . you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you add a building pad to the site. In the final exercises. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually. Using Site Tools In this lesson. and walkways.

right-click in the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. and click Site. click Training Files. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. This project file was created using the default metric template. click Toposurface. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and double-click Site. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_First_Project. click Point. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Using the first method. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. you create a toposurface using two different methods. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. expand Floor Plans. In the second part of this exercise. 678 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. 3 On the Design Bar.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference.

click Site Settings. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter 1500mm. 12000mm. click Finish Surface. and 18000mm absolute elevations. under Increment.8 On the Options Bar. under Additional Contours. 15000mm. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 In the Site Settings dialog. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. Use the following illustration as a reference.

15 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. enter 1000mm. click to delete it. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click the elevation value. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . (SteeringWheels). 18 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. under Views (all). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 14 On the View toolbar. modify the level names and elevations. on the Standard toolbar. and double-click South. click (Default 3D View). click to view it at various angles. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 16 On the View toolbar. Before importing the contour data.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 19 On the Design Bar.

26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and press ENTER. Until it is exploded. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. Click Open. and click OK. click Modify. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . select Specify. click Training Files. under Views (all). Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. double-click Site. 24 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans.21 Click the Level 2 text. rename the level Basement. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 30 On the Edit menu. 28 On the Design Bar. For Layers. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. For Colors. select Preserve. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Pin Position. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. it is considered an import symbol. 29 Select the imported topography. 23 Click the Level 1 text. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. click Yes.

and click OK. 34 Under Visibility. clear C_INDX. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. when the edges highlight. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. select it. 32 On the View menu. click Modify. and then click OK. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear Elevations. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and.31 On the Design Bar. When you select the import symbol. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Annotation Categories tab. click Toposurface. click Visibility/Graphics.

40 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 39 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. and click Save.rvt. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Surface. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 42 On the View toolbar. name the project Site-in progress.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. you add property lines using two methods. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using the first method. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Using the second method. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 684 | Chapter 19 Site .

click Property Line. 4 On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site. select Create property lines by sketching. click Lines. under Floor Plans. Click Modify. do so before continuing.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Select and delete the right vertical line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Adding Property Lines | 685 .rvt. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. On the Design Bar. and click OK. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Although you can use your preferred sketching method.

■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . select Edit Table. and click OK. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click OK. on the Standard toolbar. click Property Line. click OK. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 8 On the Options Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select the lines. 6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click 12 On the Design Bar. to delete them. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. when they highlight. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 9 In the warning dialog. add an arc line on the right. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. A warning dialog is displayed.

Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 19 In the Tags dialog. click to place the property lines. 16 Click OK. Adding Property Lines | 687 . click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 15 Starting in Row #1.14 In the Property Lines dialog. If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines.

the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Drafting. click Visibility/Graphics. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you created two sets of property lines.rfa. clear Leader. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. 22 In the Tags dialog. 25 Under Visibility. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. In the final step. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. The tags display more prominently in this view. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 23 On the View menu. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click to place it. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In this exercise. and click OK. click Tag ➤ By Category.dwg and click OK. In the next exercise. 30 On the View Control Bar. the original DWG file remains visible in the view.20 Click Load. 27 On the Options Bar. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. click the Imported Categories tab. right-click in the Design Bar. click Training Files. Before adding property line segment tags. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor.

for Subcategory. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. enter 1000.0mm. click Object Styles. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Dash dot. 2 On the Settings menu. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. and click OK. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. under Contour Line Display. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 10 Under Additional Contours. select Topography. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography.rvt. Under Subcategory. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Under Range Type. click New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select Working Contour. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. click Site Settings. Site-in progress. select a shade of Brown. select Single Value. Under Line Color. In the Object Styles dialog.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Line Pattern. enter the name Working Contour. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Click OK.

690 | Chapter 19 Site . In this exercise. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. parking areas. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Working Contour. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. In the next exercise. The next exercise requires a new training file. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. and islands. and islands. such as material.11 Click OK. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. The object style subcategory.

sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.rvt. and open Metric\m_Site. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. 2 On the Design Bar. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. Although the exact dimensions are not important. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . click Lines. try to replicate the location and proportion. click Subregion.

Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. enter Parking for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data.Tarmacadam for Name. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. click the value for Material. and click to open the Materials dialog. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK.NOTE In the Metric training file. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click Properties. click Finish Sketch.

Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration.9 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions.Tarmacadam. they display within this schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. and double-click Topography Schedule. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. As you create new subregions. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click Site. 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit Boundary. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps.

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. In this training project. 22 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 20 On the View Control Bar. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Finish Sketch. under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Delete overlapping lines. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. click Subregion. 17 On the View Control Bar. Within each subregion. double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans. Notice that the project area has increased.

Precise dimensions are not important at this time. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . select Site . click Properties. enter Island . 28 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Project Browser. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. click the value for Material. 29 On the View Control Bar. 26 In the Materials dialog. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. under Materials and Finishes. 24 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.Grass for Name. and click to open the Materials dialog.23 In the upper-right parking area. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. and click OK.Grass for Name. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule.

34 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Lines. double-click Site.Grass. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. You must sketch each region separately. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . 35 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Site . Name the subregion Walkway. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Name each region Island Grass.walkway. under Schedules/Quantities. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. click Subregion. double-click Site. 32 In the Project Browser.

double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 38 In the Project Browser. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. there is still only one toposurface. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect.

When you use the grading tool. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. this project file is required in its current state. and click Save.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. under Floor Plans. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 2 Select the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder.rvt. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.

Notice that the toposurface displays differently. click (Element Properties). select Existing for Phase Created. see the tutorial. select Copy Internal Points.3 On the Options Bar. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. under Phasing. A warning dialog is displayed. click Graded Region. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 6 On the Design Bar. Using Phasing on page 761. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. and click OK. click Modify. and click Select and Edit. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 8 Select the topographic surface.

700 | Chapter 19 Site . The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.

demolished. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and new. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 11 On the View Control Bar.

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar.13 Press DELETE. click Finish Surface. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. 18 On the View toolbar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site .

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu.20 On the View toolbar. When you add a building pad. and click OK. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 24 On the View menu. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. specify New Construction for Phase. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. specify Existing for Phase. and delete it. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. click View Properties. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. only the original toposurface displays. you create a building pad. click to view it at various angles. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. click View Properties. Therefore. (SteeringWheels). 23 Select the toposurface. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . under Phasing. Only the graded topography displays. you can delete it.

If you have an existing building model. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under Floor Plans. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. the Pick Walls command is active. click Lines. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. click Pad. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. NOTE By default. 2 On the View Control Bar.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Adding Site Components on page 706. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. 7 On the View Control Bar. this project file is required in its current state. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 9 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). 10 Click File menu ➤ Save.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Notice the new building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm .rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. click Parking Component. click Modify. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . and select the parking space. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.90 deg. double-click Site. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Adding Site Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans.

click (Default 3D View). 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. Adding Site Components | 707 .NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

Notice the new parking spaces. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Floor Plans. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.9 On the View toolbar. double-click Site. click Site Component. choose any tree type. 12 In the Type Selector. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click (SteeringWheels).

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the following illustration. click (Default 3D View). click (SteeringWheels). NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. Adding Site Components | 709 . 15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar.

under Floor Plans. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Site tutorial-in progress. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. 5 On the View menu. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Apply. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points.rvt. click Apply. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . this project file is required in its current state. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Hidden Line. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.

You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. to position the shoulder of the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 8 On the Options Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. In the following exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Click again to the left to position the leader. outside of the site. Click up and to the left.

11 On the Design Bar. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . click Modify.

Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. click Modify.■ Clear Leader. 14 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . this project file is required in its current state. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

The parking schedule is displayed. 7 Under Fields. click Tile. 12 In the Site plan. 9 On the Window menu. enter Space. and click Add.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Under Available fields. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Floor Plans. under Space. Site tutorial-in progress. 6 Click the Formatting tab. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. click the Fields tab. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. and click OK. 4 Under Available fields. 13 In the Parking Schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and under Heading. double-click Site. 8 Under Fields. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces.rvt. 11 On the Window menu. under Views (all). click Close Hidden Windows. select Parking for Category. If necessary. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and click Add. select Mark. select Mark. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . and under Heading. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. enter Size. select Type. select Type.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. finish numbering the remaining spaces. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 .Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. This allows you to know which space you are numbering.

716 .

use Element Borrowing. and click Editable. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. You can enable Worksharing for any project. Using Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. called Worksharing. stairs. All other team members can view this workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. In this tutorial. To make a workset editable. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. doors. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. such as walls. select the desired workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. go to the Worksets dialog.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. The first time you activate worksets within a project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. however. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you must first enable Worksharing. such as annotations and dimensions. After the project is shared. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. and so on. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. A workset is a collection of building elements. When you are working on a shared project. they cannot make changes to it. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Working in a shared project In a shared project. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Elements specific to a view. floors. you specify an active workset.

Shared Levels and Grids. In a multi-story structure. When setting up Worksharing. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You should have at least one workset for each person. and View worksets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.dialog. In the next exercise. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. for a typical project. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. such as a tenant interior. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In most projects. Instead. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Experience has shown that. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. not including the Project Standards. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. After learning the fundamentals. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. if a workset named Interior was created. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. On this tab. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 .Team member roles Typically. When you create a new workset. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. designers work in teams. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. When creating the new worksets. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. As new members create worksets for their own use. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. with each assigned a specific functional task. For example. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Regardless of the default setting.

however. your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. When you save to the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. This makes them available to other team members. However. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you make that workset editable by you. This is called “Selective Open. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . When you save to the central file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. When you save locally (to your local file). no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Therefore. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can select which workset is active. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. Generally. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. As you work. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. After saving to the central file. you should then save to your local file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. proceeds as usual. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. On the Options Bar. the file is saved as the central file. When finished or at regular intervals. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. within the local file. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. your changes are saved.

Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. save to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. and then save the local file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. In this conceptual exercise. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this situation. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you should check out the Materials workset. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. make any required worksets editable. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. To do this. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. and make that workset editable. Alternatively. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. using VPN. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. In this instance. if you know who checked out the required workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. for instance. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. When working remotely. In the next exercise.

You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. click Worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. The Worksets dialog displays. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 3 In the Worksets dialog.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. and notice all are editable by you. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .rvt. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. When you enable worksharing. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Your username displays as the present owner. under Show. and open Common\c_Worksets. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.

notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Because the interior walls appear in many views. Project Standards. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . and click OK. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. select Workset1. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 14 In the Worksets dialog. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. When you initially activate Worksharing. Only User-Created worksets should display. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. you can rename the default workset. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. another is assigned the interior layout. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. click . In this simple training project. click OK. In this training file. 13 In the Rename dialog. expand Views (all). click New. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. type the name Exterior Shell. 8 Click OK. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. it is better to make them visible by default. Therefore. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. under Identity Data. 17 On the Options Bar. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. You do. 9 Click New.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. For training purposes. For example. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. currently named Workset1. clear Families. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. however. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. and Views. clear Visible by default in all views. 12 Click Rename. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. ■ 5 Under Show. imagine four users including yourself. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 16 In the drawing area. In this case. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets.

under Identity Data. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. including the interior doors. under Identity Data. and click OK. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click . 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the View menu. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click .19 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. 21 On the Options Bar. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 23 Select all of the interior elements. stairs. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select Interior Layout for Workset. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. 29 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. and click OK. In this exercise. and click OK. If any interior elements remain. click Close. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Visibility/Graphics. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 35 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View menu. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 43 Click OK. you enabled Worksharing on a project. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. select Interior Layout for Workset. click Save As. Now that you have created the central file. 42 On the right side of the dialog. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 44 On the File menu. 38 In the Save As dialog.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click . double-click Level 2. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 34 In the drawing area. 33 In the Project Browser. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. under Identity Data. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 41 In the Worksets dialog. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Non Editable. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click the Worksets tab. under Views (all). 39 Click Save. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Floor Plans. 32 Select Interior Layout.

select all the User-Created worksets. 6 On the File menu. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 7 In the Save As dialog. In addition. Before working on the model. 4 Click Open. If you have not yet completed the exercise. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. and select Specify. click Save As. Next. you create your local file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select Interior Layout for Name. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 13 On the Window menu. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. and click Save. 15 In the Project Browser. please do so before continuing. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. expand Views (all). The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. select Interior Layout. 12 Click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. select the central file. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. In this case. check out worksets. and double-click Level 1. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. make modifications to the building model. and select Yes for Editable. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 11 In the Worksets dialog. click Open. click Worksets. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only.

Because this element is not owned by another user. 22 Click OK. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . In this case. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. click Modify. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. If this is selected.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. however. click . Verify that it is cleared. In the Worksets dialog. On the Options Bar. you can still edit this wall. If it was owned by another user. click . 23 On the File menu. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. under Identity Data. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 20 Under Constraints. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. notice the Editable Only option. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. 24 Click OK. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. click Worksets. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area.

728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Modify. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.126mm Partition (2-hr). select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. select Basic Wall: Interior . 31 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 26 Delete the door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The precise location is not important. 34 In the Type Selector. click Door. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.

You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. make elements editable. You modified the building model. add two door openings into the rooms you created. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. and reload the latest changes. At the end of a work session. it is recommended. Whenever you save. a tooltip. two users access the central file through a network connection. you should perform regular saves. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. please do so before continuing. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Saving your work 36 On the File menu.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. leave this file open in its current state. By default. save to central. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. which matches the information in the Status Bar. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. If you have not yet completed these exercises. you should relinquish all worksets. checked out worksets. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Throughout the process. you created your local file. In this particular case. each user must check out worksets. When working in your local file. In addition. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. displays the workset as well as the element type. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. In this exercise. Borrowed Elements is selected. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. and save locally immediately afterward. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. For training purposes.

16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 4 Click the General Tab and. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. skip the following section. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 3 On the Settings menu. select all the User-Created worksets. This file is for your use only. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Open. enter User 2. click Save As.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and select Yes for Editable. instructions are staggered. one user has already created a local file. 7 In the Open dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and select Specify. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. consider that person to be User 1. User 2: Create a local file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. click Options. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. click Worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. In the following section of this exercise. For training purposes. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. return to the Settings dialog. and click Save. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise.rvt. You now have a local copy of the project. and click OK. select the central file. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. In addition. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 12 In the Save As dialog. under Username. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and click OK. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and proceed to Creating a local copy. 9 Click Open. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 15 On the File menu. specifically sequenced. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Options. 11 On the File menu. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. This is a system setting. and click OK.

and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. click Save to Central. click Worksets. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. and select Yes for Editable. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. expand Floor Plans. If it is not open. select the lower exterior wall. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser.You are now the owner of that workset.” 29 Click OK. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. it becomes the active workset. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 17 Click OK. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 19 On the File menu. modify the building model. 24 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and double-click Level 1. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. User 1: Check out worksets. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 27 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . expand Views (all). 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. 23 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. open it now.

click Save to Central. you should create a furniture plan view. and click OK. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Views (all). and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. and click OK.” 39 Click OK. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Reload Latest. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 46 In the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. right-click Copy of Level 1. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 44 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. click Worksets. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. under Floor Plans. 43 In the Project Browser. 33 On the File menu. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 37 On the File menu. However. right-click Level 1. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Before adding any furniture. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. When you save to central. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 41 On the File menu. 42 Select Furniture Layout.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. 45 In the Rename View dialog.” 35 Click OK. Click Yes. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them.

select Project Standards. 53 On the File menu. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Reload Latest. click Component. 66 On the File menu. are placed under Project Standards. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. and click OK. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. 48 In the Type Selector. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Rename. and click Element Properties. and click inside any room. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 59 In the Type Properties dialog.” 55 Click OK. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Save to Central. such as Wall Types. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . rather than Families. click the Worksets tab. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 61 Click OK 2 times. Therefore. 62 On the File menu. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. choose any desk. click Save to Central. 65 Click OK. 49 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Worksets. the Visible by default option was not selected. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 50 On the View menu. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. under Show. 60 In the Rename dialog.200mm. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. enter Exterior Wall . Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Visibility/Graphics. NOTE System families. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. and click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.

NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. User 1: Reload latest. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and published their changes back to the central file. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select Reload Latest. In the left pane of the Open dialog. throughout this training. and save 69 On the File menu. and these problems are rectified.rvt. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. Checking out worksets. and click OK. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. leave this file open in its current state. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. modified the building model. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. There are specific instructions for each user. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. In subsequent steps. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. At the appropriate point in this exercise. As each of you work. 70 On the File menu. you save the training file as a central file.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. leave this file open in its current state. click Training Files. and still have your local files open. click Save As. select the following. click Options. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. This exercise requires two users and. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). finished the previous workset exercises. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you need to set up your central and local files. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Each user checked out worksets. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. select Save to Central. Each user must have network access to the central file. In the final exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises.

and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. return to the Settings dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. 8 In the Save As dialog. This is the local file for User 1. and click Save. 18 In the Save As dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Options. click Save As. and click OK. 15 Click Open. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. click Open. Next. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. click Options. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. select Make this a Central File after save. 17 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 13 In the Open dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. In addition. and select Specify. Set the Username to User 2. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. click Options. The central file should still be open. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click Save. 5 Click Save. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. select the central file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This is a system setting. and click OK. 6 On the File menu. click Save As. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 12 On the File menu. On the Settings menu. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1.

User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. click Worksets. and click Editing Requests. click Worksets. under Floor Plans. At this point. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. and select Yes for Editable. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 30 On the left exterior wall. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. Afterwards. select Interior Layout. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 29 On the Options Bar. and select Yes for Editable. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. select them. select the second window from the top. double-click Level 1. You are now the owner of that workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. 24 Under Active Workset. verify that Editable Only is cleared. After you submit the request. 22 In the Worksets dialog. if any User-Created worksets are not open. select the Interior Layout workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Worksets dialog. click the File menu. and then click OK. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 27 Under Active Workset. and then click OK. You are now the owner of that workset. and click Open. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. select Exterior Shell.

and close 39 On the File menu. User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. 36 Click Close. select the request submitted by User 2. and click OK. A message informs you that your request has been granted. 38 Click OK.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. click Close. to Local. 35 Click Grant. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. In this case. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. In this multi-user exercise. select Save to Central. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. click Check Now. you requested permission to edit the element. select the following.

738 .

and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The client has asked you to create various options. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. After you and the client agree on the final design. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. For example. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 739 . These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. Using design options.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this tutorial. At any time in the design process. In this particular case. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.

and click Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Training Files. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. In the final exercise of this lesson. the only available command is to create a new option set. the roof and structure systems must work together. you design each of the structural options. After you create a design option. click New. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. each with multiple design options. you set up multiple design option sets.In the first exercise in this lesson. and delete the unwanted options from the project. TIP In this exercise. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. under Option Set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. make your final design decision. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. therefore. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you can edit it. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. With the second option. In the second exercise. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Edit Selected.rvt. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. each is constructed for interchangeability.

13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. 11 On the Edit toolbar. click 12 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments.4 In the Project Browser. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). select: ■ ■ ■ . add three columns. By selecting Multiple. expand Floor Plans. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. 7 In the Type Selector. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 9 On the Design Bar. and the third column centered between the two. or add a dimension string between the columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 5 On the View menu. In this case. click Modify. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. In the following illustration. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. TIP To center the middle column. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Column. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. A copy of the three selected columns is added. When you are finished.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click . Because of the size of the columns. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. they are difficult to see in this view. using the same technique. 18 On the View toolbar. 17 Zoom out and.

two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 19 In the Project Browser. The first click specifies the beam start point. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. Use the following illustration as a guide. double-click TOP OF CORE. 23 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm.Notice the 12 columns that you added. 21 In the Type Selector. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Next. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Zoom in on the upper right column. click Modify. click Beam. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. you add the beams that span the columns. In it.

744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy. select: ■ ■ ■ . move down to the next set of columns. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. click . click 26 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. and click the center point. zoom into the left column.

select Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 45 Under Roofing. 40 In the Rename dialog. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 37 Select Option 2 and. under Option Set. and click OK. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. 36 In the Rename dialog. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. 38 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. and click OK. enter Beam for New. under Option. 46 Under Option.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 33 Click Finish Editing. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. 34 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. click New. under Option. enter Structure for New. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. under Option Set. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click New. enter Brackets for New. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. name the option Louvers. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Rename. under Option. not a new option set. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. 43 In the Rename dialog. enter Roofing for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). under Option.

Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. it will resemble the following illustration. 48 Under Option. under Floor Plans. select Edit Selected.47 Under Roofing. Under Now Editing. This allows you to more easily manage the project. you create the second design option. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. name the option Sunscreen. 50 In the Design Options dialog. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. select Option 2. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 53 In the Project Browser. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . double-click ROOF TERRACE. under Structure. 51 Under Edit. 52 Click Close. select Beam. click Rename. When finished. and click OK.

click Component. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Roof Beam. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . The second click represents the plane that is moved. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click Modify. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .60 After aligning the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Click to indicate the end point of the move. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 62 Select the beam and. 61 On the Design Bar. The second click represents the move end point. The first click sets the move start point. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. on the Edit toolbar.

Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam.rvt. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . Notice that even before you close the dialog. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 66 On the View toolbar. 68 In the Design Options dialog. click Save As. 67 On the Tools menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. click . Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. which is visible by default. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. name the file. 70 On the File menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. m_Urban_House-in progress. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. you need this file in its current state. 69 Click Close. click Finish Editing. and click Save.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. open it now. expand Views (all). The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. do so now. In the next exercise. If you need to add dimensions. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. 4 Under Edit. The second roofing system. 10 Referring to the following illustration. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you set up multiple design option sets. 3 In the Design Options dialog. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. a Louver system. 2 On the Tools menu. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. With the second option. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. Sunscreen.rvt. select Louvers (primary). 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . each with multiple design options to pick from. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. 6 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. you design each of the roofing options. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. delete them after the rafter is in place. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. Under Now Editing. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. 5 Click Close. expand Floor Plans. under Roofing. and double-click TOP OF CORE. the other for beams. The first option. click Edit Selected. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. click Component. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial.

17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move To. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click . Enter 5 for Number. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. Select Constrain. 15 On the Edit menu. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Array. enter 11750 mm for Length. under Other. 13 On the Options Bar.

18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. when the listening dimension displays. and press ENTER. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.

enter 5475 mm for Length. 27 For the array starting point. click Modify. Select 2nd for Move To. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 On the Design Bar. and select the louver you just placed. under Other. Enter 34 for Number. 20 In the Type Selector. Select Constrain. 23 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click Array. 25 With the louver still selected. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . 26 On the Options Bar. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. click the Edit menu. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. click Component. click .

when the listening dimension displays. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. click . enter 300. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and press Enter. and.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar.

40 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Tools menu. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. and double-click West. expand Elevations. and click OK. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. select Sunscreen. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views.The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. Click OK. click Finish Editing. 39 On the Design Bar. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Therefore. click Lines. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. 34 In the Project Browser. click Edit Selected. 33 Under Editing. click . click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Edit. In this case. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. under Roofing. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. and then click Close.

enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. 46 On the Tools menu. 41 Select the top of the left column. click Trim/Extend. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. 45 Click OK.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 43 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. Select the right arc. the top of the next column on the right. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click Finish Sketch. The first two points define the ends of the line. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. click Properties. 48 On the Design Bar. 49 On the View toolbar. The arcs should connect. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. then the center arc. and the third point defines the arc. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Under Constraints. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. click . 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. You will fix this in a later step. then you can modify it through the dimension. Under Constraints. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Save. you designed each of the roofing options. make it part of the building model. enter Primary Option. secondary. 3 In the Rename View dialog. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 50 On the Tools menu. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 4 In the Project Browser. under Edit. 52 On the File menu. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. and then click Close. under 3D Views. Sunscreen. tertiary. you select a design. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. do so now. and last options. right-click {3D}. expand 3D Views. The second roofing system. Managing Design Options | 757 . right-click the 3D View Primary Option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Views (all). NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. and delete the discarded design options. Managing Design Options In this exercise. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. The first option. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Finish Editing. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. you need this file in its current state. After exploring the combinations. and click OK. 51 In the Design Options dialog. under Views (all). a Louver system.The louver roof system is complete. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. and click Duplicate.

click the Design Options tab. under 3D Views. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser.5 Right-click each of the copies. and click OK. 7 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. double-click Secondary Option. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). double-click Primary Option. click the Design Options tab. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. and click Rename. under Views (all). 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 11 On the View menu.

click Visibility/Graphics. click the Design Options tab. 19 On the View menu. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. Managing Design Options | 759 . specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. under Views (all). In this case. under 3D Views. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. In your design options. under Views (all). At this point. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. click Visibility/Graphics. 15 On the View menu. under 3D Views. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. double-click Tertiary Option. double-click Last Option.

double-click Primary Option. 31 In the alert dialog. In this exercise. This was the client choice for structural. 25 Select Structure. Because the client has selected the design option. click Yes. select Make Primary. click Delete to remove the views that used options. you selected a design. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. 29 Select Roofing. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 35 On the File menu. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. After exploring the combinations. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. but should be accepted as part of the building model. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. select Beam. 24 Under Option. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 30 Under Option Set. An alert is displayed. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. since you no longer need them. 26 Under Option Set. The set is deleted.22 On the Tools menu. made it part of the building model. click Delete. and deleted the discarded design options. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Save. 27 In the alert dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Yes. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. the current primaries are no longer options. click Accept Primary. 23 In the Design Options dialog. under Structure. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Close.

For the client. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. demolish existing construction. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. complete with schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. In the second exercise. 761 . You create new phases. You create new phases. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing walls and doors. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. and then add new building model elements. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. This changes room definition and total building model area. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. In the lesson and exercises that follow. In the second exercise. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.Project Phasing 22 In any project. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules.

click Training Files. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you add new elements to the building model. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. 6 On the Options Bar. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. are visible in this view.rvt. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Modify. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. and open Common\c_Phasing. click (Element Properties). If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. click Project Units. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . go to the Settings menu.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. During the demolition and renovation process. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. 4 Click Cancel. When you create a new project. expand Floor Plans. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. define the units. under Phasing. under Phasing. 7 Click Cancel. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. In the Element Properties dialog. regardless of phase. If you wish to do so. This means that all building model elements. and click OK. and double-click Level 1.

12 On the Options Bar. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Level 1 . under Phasing. right-click Level 1 . 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans.Existing. select Existing. Because this is a renovation project. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. 16 In the Rename dialog. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. including the door tags. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 17 Click No. 19 In the Project Browser.Existing. TIP If this were a multi-story building. enter Level 1 . and click OK. all of the building model elements. right-click Level 1. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 18 In the Project Browser. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. are highlighted in red. Because this is a phase-specific view. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. click .Demo. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click Modify. and click Rename. and click OK. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. 11 In the Filter dialog. After you release the mouse button. enter Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 763 .Existing. clear Door Tags. for Phase Created. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. After you create the views.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 20 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views.

The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. however. under New. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 29 For Composite Plan. select Overridden. 27 Click New. There are five default phase filters. select Existing. click the Phase Filters tab. under Floor Plans. In this case. Demolished. you modify these settings. On a logical time line. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 28 Under Filter Name. and Temporary. You may need to zoom in to see this. Because of this time relationship.Demo. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. double-click Level 1 . double-click Level 1 . to which all the building model elements belong. Phase status is time-dependent. 26 In the Phasing dialog. under Phasing. for Phase. 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 24 In the Project Browser. Next. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. enter Composite Plan. Later in this exercise. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab.Existing. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. new construction occurs after existing construction. Existing. and click OK. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New.

Phasing Your Model | 765 .31 Under Phase Status. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. Next. select Demolished. 35 Click OK twice. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. 42 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 32 In the Demolished row. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. double-click Level 1 . 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. When you demolish the host. or you can use the demolish tool. As you click each wall. click the value for Color. you demolish all elements hosted by it. under Floor Plans. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. select red.Demo. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. click (Demolish). under Cut ➤ Lines. select the interior walls one at a time. 34 In the Color dialog. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. click OK. under Floor Plans. 36 Using the same method. select the line style. you begin demolition. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. its display changes to a red dashed line. select a lighter blue. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue.Existing. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. There are two ways to demolish an element.

select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". click Wall. for Phase Filter. The demolished walls no longer display. 52 Open Level 1 . 55 In the Element Properties dialog. add a long horizontal wall.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click OK. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 50 In the Type Selector. select Show Previous + New. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector. under Phasing. click Door.Existing. select Basic Wall: Interior .Demo. 53 Open Level 1 . 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . for Phase Filter. 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Add a door leading into each room. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Phasing. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. and click OK.

right-click Level 1 . spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 62 If necessary.New. because the phase filter is set to Show All. All elements are displayed in this view. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 . which are displayed as red. 59 Open Level 1 . regardless of phase. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo.Demo. The renovated building model plan is displayed. 61 On the View Control Bar. Phasing Your Model | 767 . 57 In the Project Browser. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View). new is shown in blue. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). and existing shows as half-tone.New. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 60 On the View toolbar.

you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. If you wish to do so. As the renovation process continues. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. In this view. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. All room boundaries are phase-specific.Demo. therefore. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. click Training Files. demolition. In the next exercise. the rooms change in both definition and size.rvt. 2 Open Level 1 . you can see the new walls added to the building model. go to the Settings menu. and new construction. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. you can do so at this time. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. You can also see that the room quantities. 3 Open Level 1 .Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . sizes. you do not need to change the project units to metric. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. In this exercise.Existing. and double-click Level 1 . expand Floor Plans. In this view. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. define the units. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 Close the file. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. If you wish to save this file. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. Notice that this view is the original building model. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. click Project Units. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style.New.

Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . and maximize the view. click Room. 9 On the Design Bar.New. click Modify. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. In the Phasing dialog. click Room. Use the following illustration as a guide. 5 Click OK. click in each room as you move to the right. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 13 Open Level 1 . click Room Tag.Existing. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 10 Open Level 1 . click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 11 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide.Demo. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction.

In this exercise.Existing. expand Schedules/Quantities. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. and double-click Room Schedule . 16 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file.New Construction. In this case.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 18 Open Room Schedule . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. click Tile. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . The two schedule views tile. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. In addition. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. 17 On the Window menu. click Close Hidden Windows. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 19 On the Window menu. View phase-specific room schedules. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.

Comparison of alternatives on a site. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. performance. In the final lesson. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. You position the building models on the site plan. In this tutorial. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. modify their visibility. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. and manage the links throughout the project. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In these situations.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed.

NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. modify their visibility. One building model is a condominium. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files.Linking Building Models In this lesson. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. and the other is a townhouse. You link two building models to the project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. You position the building models on the site. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Automatic placement options: ■ Auto .

3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Open. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. and click OK. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. This option is grayed out.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. with write permission. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. c_Condo_Complex. c_Townhouse. Otherwise. and click Properties. click Open. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu. however. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. click Save As. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. Click Open. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. All three files now reside. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. select the three files. 8 Clear Read-only. this system is not exposed to the user. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . RELATED See the lesson. right-click. in the Model Linking folder that you created. 2 On the File menu. 4 On the File menu. click Close. click Training Files. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder.rvt.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.■ Auto . Auto . NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. ■ ■ Manual . 5 On the File menu. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . Manual . Select c_Site. you can do so. and save the file there. this option will place the link at a predefined location. and open Common\c_Site.

10 In the Project Browser.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. If you wish to do so. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. For Positioning. you can go to the Settings menu. and make your changes. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. click Project Units. 11 On the File menu. expand Floor Plans.Origin to Origin. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 13 Click Open. expand Views (all). click Import/Link ➤ Revit. select Auto . Notice the blue detail lines. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and double-click Level 1. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.

The first click specifies the move start point. 17 For the move endpoint. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. The Move command requires two clicks. click (Move). The linked model moves as one object.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. After you select it.rvt displays in the Type Selector. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. 15 On the Edit toolbar. Standard move commands work with linked building models. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 16 For the move start point.

Origin to Origin. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto . 18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open. and select c_Townhouse. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. For Positioning. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.After you specify the location to move to.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . In this case. click to specify the rotation start point. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. click (Rotate). To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. and click to specify the end of the rotation. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. you first specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise.

Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. click (Move). Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. 30 For the starting point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. click (Copy).The townhouse is located within its required footprint. The first click specifies the start point. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar.

under Identity data. 37 On the View toolbar. and click OK. use the Move command to make any adjustments. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 32 On the Edit menu. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . for Name. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Townhouse A. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. click (Default 3D View). 34 On the Options Bar.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. click . click Rotate.

you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. If you have not completed the previous exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. click (SteeringWheels). click Save. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . After linking the files. they were placed too low within the site topography. In the next exercise. In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. click and hold Orbit. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. do so before continuing. In this exercise. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation.38 On the File menu. When you originally linked the files. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.

and then select the plane that you want to align. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. click (Align). press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. under Views (all). This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.rvt. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. In this case. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. and double-click South. 7 On the Tools toolbar. Click the Revit Links tab.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. When using the Align command. when it highlights. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. In the steps that follow. expand Elevations. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. and click to select the line. and click to select it. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you first select the plane you want to align to. To do this. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click (Default 3D View). align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click 13 On the View toolbar. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. click and hold Orbit. 9 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). under Elevations. double-click North. 12 On the View toolbar. 14 On the SteeringWheels. This would over-constrain the model. 11 Return to the South elevation view. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click Save. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 15 On the File menu.

expand c_Townhouse.rvt. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. double-click South. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. you can independently control the visibility settings. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. or Custom. you need this project file open and in this view. click the Revit Links tab. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. select <Custom>. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. In the next exercise. display settings. 10 Click OK. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. When you link a file. 9 Under Visibility. If you have not completed the previous exercise. under Elevations. click By Host View. scroll down and clear Levels. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. By linked view. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 2 On the View menu. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. click Custom. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. click OK. If the Basics page is set to Custom. and the halftone settings for each linked project. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. detail level.rvt. As you can see. In this exercise. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 8 For Annotation Categories. click Visibility/Graphics. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Under Visibility. the defaults are set to By host view for all options.

Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. or fine.rvt. By default. under Display Settings. no detail level changes are required. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 16 Under Visibility. and then set the detail level to coarse. expand c_Townhouse. and click OK. With linked files. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. Using the Custom option. on the Basics tab.rvt. double-click Level 1. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. 23 In the Model categories list. select Custom. select <Custom>. click Visibility/Graphics. You can click the value for Detail Level. 24 Click OK. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . 22 Click the Model Categories tab. 20 For c_Townhouse. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. click the Revit Links tab. under Floor Plans. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click By Host View. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By selecting custom under Model Categories. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. medium. 14 On the View menu. In this case.

and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. 25 On the Revit Links tab. phase. demolished. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. 31 On the File menu. click Save. existing. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. on a sloped site for instance.rvt. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. However. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. you need this project file open and in this view. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. With the Show All filter applied. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. All other components are grayed out. there are situations. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. In this case. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In most cases. In this case.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. 26 Under Display Settings. 28 Select By linked view for View range. click OK. you manage the linked files. under Visibility. 29 Click OK. all new. By default. select c_Townhouse. In this exercise. In the next exercise. this is preferable. and phase filter of a specific link. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view.

Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Locations Not Saved. They supply information regarding the links. 3 Under Path Type. As links are moved to new locations in the host project.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 4 Under Linked File. do so before continuing. In a shared coordinate environment. click Yes. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. You learn more about this in the next lesson. In general. the link is maintained. 5 Click Unload. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. 6 At the confirmation prompt. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 7 Click OK. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. The default path type is Relative. and Saved Path fields are read only. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. click the Revit tab. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. click Manage Links. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. Notice the Loaded.rvt. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. select c_Condo_Complex.

NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. right-click c_Condo_Complex. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled.rvt. However. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. In general. the link is not loaded. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. 8 In the Project Browser. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. expand Revit Links. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. 9 On the File menu. click Save As. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and click Reload. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. In these cases. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. and select Specify. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. To do this. If you choose not to open that workset. click the arrow next to the Open button. When you initially place the link. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file.

navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. The host file consists primarily of site components. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. When used in conjunction with model linking. name the file Site_Project. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When you share coordinates between projects.10 In the Save As dialog. you are establishing a shared origin point. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. and save it as an RVT file. and the resulting project files. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. do so before continuing. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). leave the project file open in its current view. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. In this exercise. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In essence. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In the next lesson.

click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. click Open. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. 3 In the drawing area. Select Site_Project. click the Condo Complex. If you have not completed the lesson. open it before continuing. In this case.rvt and click Open. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. 2 On the Tools menu. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. If you have closed the project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson.coordinates are used. do so before continuing. As indicated in the Status Bar. Linking Building Models on page 772. and the resulting project files. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. When you are working in the host project.

if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. do so before continuing.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. even though both models originate from one linked file. select Location 1. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . but can have multiple additional locations. Lot B. On the Status Bar. and click OK. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. However. this location is not saved outside of the host project. when the edges highlight. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. it is placed at a specific location. and Lot C. click to select it. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. These three locations can be named Lot A. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. you need this project file open and in this view. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. In this exercise. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. If you have not completed the exercise.

notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Change. click Not Shared for Shared Location. When constraining a link to a location. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. under Instance Parameters. select Move instance to. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. click . 7 In the Rename dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. click OK.2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. . under Instance Parameters. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. This is a one-time operation. enter Lot A for New. click Rename. 4 Under Value. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. click Reconcile. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. In the Choose Location dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 12 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Select Location dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. Record the current position as a location.

Because Lot A is currently in use. Notice the OK button is still not active. and then select the townhouse project. and click OK. or cancel the action. The second click specifies the move endpoint. and click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. By relocating a project. To explicitly save a location. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 19 In the Select Location dialog. make sure Lot B is selected. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. ignore the warning. click Manage Links. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. select Save. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. enter Lot B for Name. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. When you relocate a project. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. and the left townhouse resides at that location. click OK. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 16 Click Change. Record current position as. click Duplicate. Save locations 21 On the File menu. The first click specifies the move start point. 30 On the Tools menu. When you create a location. This is a two-click process. you cannot redefine its location. a warning displays. and click OK. 23 Click Save Locations. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. select the second option. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. 26 Click OK. When you release the mouse button. click the Revit tab. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. click OK. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Notice the OK button is not active. the active location position is moved. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there.

Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 34 On the File menu. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Close. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 36 On the File menu. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. NOTE In the following exercise. and click OK. select Save. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. In this exercise. you work in one of the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Save.

2 On the File menu. Because this building model only has one named location. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. Select c_Condo_Complex. do so before continuing. In addition. The current active location is Lot A. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.By Shared Coordinates. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. double-click 1st Floor.rvt file. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. When opening the linked file. Click Open.rvt file. under Floor Plans. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. it is placed automatically within the host project. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. select Auto . If you have not completed the exercises. In this exercise. For Positioning. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Open. Also. if other models were linked into the same host.

Notice that Lot A is the current active location. and click OK. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. In this exercise. select True North for Orientation. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. and click Make Current. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. under Graphics. you can select Lot C if necessary. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click OK. you manage the shared locations. and click OK. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Manage Place and Locations. In the host file. In this exercise. enter Lot C. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you create a new location. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. If you have not completed the exercises. you need this project file open and in this view. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. do so before continuing. 6 Select Lot B. orient a view to true north. 3 In the Name dialog. click View Properties. click Duplicate. In the next exercise.

7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. On the Options Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. click Open. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. In this exercise. Select Site_Project. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.rvt and click Open. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. click Close. If you have not completed the exercise. 10 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . You can save the file if you wish. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. do so before continuing. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area.

click the Fields tab. select Doors. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. and click OK. 5 Under Available fields. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . under Category.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count.

right-click Door Schedule. 14 On the File menu. click Close. and click Properties. and then click OK twice. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. clear Itemize every instance. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. 12 Select Grand totals. expand Schedules/Quantities. In this exercise. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . 13 On the File menu. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.8 Click OK. click Save. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. You have completed this tutorial. under Other. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

and click OK. 11 Under Colors. 6 In the New Project dialog. you create an office template. 803 . 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. In the first lesson. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click the Graphics tab. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. click Browse. journal cleanup options. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you modify the system environment. click the Graphics tab. In the second lesson. which is independent of the project settings. and set it as your default template. and your username when using worksets. 3 In the Options dialog. click the value for Selection color.rte. 4 Under Colors. they are not saved to project files or template files. Notice that the drawing area is black. Finally. notification preferences. under Template file. 10 In the Options dialog. click Training Files. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. These settings control the graphics. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. selection default options. 8 In the New Project dialog. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. select Invert background color. click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects.

13 Click the General tab. click the Graphics tab. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. When an error occurs. click Wall. select red. For Tooltip assistance. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. click Modify. 14 Under Notifications.rvt. 19 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Options dialog. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 22 When prompted to save changes. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. and open Metric\m_Settings. click No. clear Invert background color. select yellow. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. For Selection color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. and select the wall. 18 On the Design Bar. click Training Files.12 In the Color dialog. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select One hour. However. 15 Click OK. select None. click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. the elements causing the error display using this color.

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. 4 Click Cancel. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. centralized. If prompted. 8 Click Cancel. 10 In the Places dialog. and click Open. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. click Places. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. TIP To view a template. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. such as in a large. and family libraries. Specifying File Locations on page 805. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Under Username. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. family template files. select Normal. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. do not save the changes. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). 3 Under Default template file. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. For Tooltip assistance. you can start a new project with that template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Browse. 2 In the Options dialog. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Under Journal File Cleanup. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. These files are used in the software support process. However. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. notice the list of library names. click the File Locations tab. including your default project template. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 7 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions.27 Click the General tab. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 5 Under Default path for user files. select your preferred Save reminder interval. click Browse. you specify default file locations. Your login name displays by default. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. and click Browse to select a template. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path.

Load.library names and path. and click Open. and change the name to My Library. and you can create new libraries. 11 In the Places dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration. and Import dialogs. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and select it as the library path. Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. saving. or families. or loading a Revit Architecture file. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . templates. under Libraries. click (Add Value). you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. When you are opening. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click the icon side of the field.

17 Click File menu ➤ Open. specify the new location here. such as bump maps. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 9 In the text editor. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 15 Under Library Name. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and click OK twice. (Remove Value) to delete the library. click Edit. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. 22 Click Places. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. and decal image files. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Load. 23 Select My Library. 3 Under Settings. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. click Edit. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 19 Click Cancel. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 2 In the Options dialog. 28 Click OK. click the My Library icon. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Spelling tab.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. enter sheetmtl-Cu. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. click My Library. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Save. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 5 In the text editor. 24 Click 25 Click OK. scroll down the list of building industry terms. This path is determined during installation. custom color files. view the current path. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and Import dialogs. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise.

click OK. click OK.11 In the Options dialog. 20 Under Personal dictionary. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. work with snapping turned off. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 14 Click in the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 12 On the Standard toolbar. If prompted. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. delete sheetmtl-CU. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 19 Under Settings. click default template. you modify snap increments. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 18 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Modify. 23 In the Options dialog. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. In this exercise. you modify snap settings. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. 21 In the text editor. click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 22 In the text editor. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Template file. click Edit.rte. click Text. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click OK. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Restore Defaults. 4 In the New Project dialog. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. do not save the changes. click Training Files.

11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. click Wall. While sketching. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. and move the cursor to the right. clear Chain.. If it does not. 7 Under Object Snaps. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu.6 Under Dimension Snaps. 10 On the Options Bar. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . snapping reverts to the system default settings. For example. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you do not have a wheel button. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. enter SM. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . TIP To zoom while sketching. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and enter 500 . zoom out until it does so. use the wheel button on your mouse. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments.

and the wall edges. and do not save the file. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. and move the cursor to the right. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 21 Move the cursor downward. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. and specify the wall endpoint.. it will snap to the endpoints. 24 Click OK. If you move the cursor along the wall. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. click Modify. This is the increment that you added previously. and delete the value 500 . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that snapping is once again active. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and click Wall. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 18 Enter SM. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the midpoint. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. Finally. and object styles. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. and open Metric\m_Settings. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Using these options. In the steps that follow. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. lines. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. annotations. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. When you apply a material to an element.rvt. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. fill patterns. You create and modify materials. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you render a region to observe the changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. save the project file with a unique name.

scale. These details will display in rendered images. and double-click 02 Entry Level. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. The Render Appearance Library is a local. 3 Click (Duplicate). and select Masonry . The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. and texture of the material.Stone. When a model element is loaded into a project. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. 10 Click the Graphics tab. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. The properties describe the color. enter Masonry . 11 Click OK. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and click (Element Properties). all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select the lower exterior wall. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. 9 Click Apply. Masonry . In the steps that follow. However. for Class.Fieldstone.Fieldstone. select Stone.Fieldstone material. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. When you change properties of a render appearance. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . read-only library for render appearances. and click OK. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 6 Click Replace. In the Materials dialog. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. In the next exercise. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated.

click Edit/New. 20 In the Materials dialog. . the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 24 In the Type Selector. 16 Enter the new wall name. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Creating and Applying Materials | 813 .Brick. 25 On the View toolbar. click in the Material field. and click OK. click Model Graphics Style. 18 For Finish 1. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 23 While pressing CTRL. select the rear exterior wall.Fieldstone. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. 15 Click Duplicate. Fieldstone on CMU. 22 Select the left exterior wall. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.Fieldstone. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 17 For Structure. click Edit. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 21 Click OK three times. select Masonry . 26 On the View Control Bar. click This is the material that you created.14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Default 3D View).

and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and click Rendering. click Render. 29 In the 3D view. for Setting. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . When finished. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. In the following exercise. 31 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. select Low or Medium. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Rendering Dialog. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. under Quality. select Region. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select the render region (a red rectangle). This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. The rendering process begins.

click Show the model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. and clear Region. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . choose Model. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. click Show the model.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Drafting pattern density is fixed. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. expand Elevations. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. click Import. Then click Render again. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns.rvt. 33 In the Rendering dialog. m_Settings-in progress. 5 Click New. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. in the Rendering dialog. select Custom. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and double-click West. such as steel. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 3 Under Pattern Type. Zoom into the model. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 7 Under Custom.rvt. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.

click to select a fill pattern. 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. for Finish 1. click Training Files. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 11 Click OK. 10 For Name. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model.pat. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . enter . 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and for Import scale. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. (Element Properties).56. 13 On the Options Bar. 9 Under Custom. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 18 Under Surface Pattern. select Model. 22 Click OK three times. 21 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. click . enter Fieldstone. click 15 For Structure. click Edit. click OK.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. select fldstn. click Edit/New. under Pattern Type. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click Modify. click in the Material field. In the Materials dialog. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .Fieldstone material.Fieldstone.

m_Settings-in progress. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. and double-click 3 Windows. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. expand 3D Views. For example. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. there are often multiple window types within a project. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. you can set the window frame material to By Category. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region).25 On the View toolbar. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. 2 On the keyboard. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. click (Default 3D View). TIP If the pattern does not display. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you.

4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click in the Value column. . and click 15 Click OK twice. 8 In the Materials dialog. click By Category. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click OK twice. 16 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.3 On the View Control Bar. click in the Value column. click By Category (located under the materials list). click (Element Properties). 5 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Select the arched window. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. for Trim Exterior Material. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click . 14 In the Materials dialog.

and click OK. for Class. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. select Paint. 25 In the search field. click OK. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . click in the Material column. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. click OK. 19 For Trim. and click OK. select Trim. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. for Name. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. descriptions. type red. When you render a 3D view. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. . 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. and select Trim. 23 Click Replace. or keywords include the word red. (Duplicate). 30 In the Object Styles dialog.red paint. expand Windows. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 18 On the Model Objects tab. enter Trim . Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 28 Under Shading.

Use object styles to apply the change to all views. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.31 On the View toolbar. for Name. 11 For Line Pattern. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. is open with the 3D view active. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Default 3D view). 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 7 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. select Roof Line. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. select Roofs. select Red. m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. click New. Now that you have created a line pattern.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. enter Roof Line. under Category. 10 For Line Color. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.

Notice that the line color displays in this view. and verify that Hidden Line is selected.12 Click OK. under 3D Views. double-click to Building. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . 13 In the Project Browser.

double-click 03 Roof. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 For Line Pattern. 18 For Line Color. under Floor Plans. For Color. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. select Roofs. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. For Pattern. select Roof Line. sections. select Blue.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. elevations. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 In the Project Browser. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. under Category. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. select 5. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Solid. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 22 On the Model Categories tab. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 20 Click OK. click Override. for Visibility. select Roofs. select Black. Plans.

For Line Color. select Level: 02 Entry Level. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. For Line Pattern. double-click Site. (Line). 33 In the Type Selector. Click Click (Draw). 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. enter Zoning Setback. This places the line above the topography. 29 For Name. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. select Double dash. and click OK. 30 For the Zoning Setback category.25 Click OK twice. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 31 Click OK. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. under Modify Subcategories. specify the following: ■ For Plane. click Lines. select Zoning Setback. select 2. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . click New. Notice the site topography and the property lines. select Red. 34 On the Options Bar.

Expand Site. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Lines. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 40 In the Project Browser. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and clear Zoning Setback. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and then clear Property Lines. 39 Click OK. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. under Floor Plans. 36 On the View toolbar. and clear Property Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Model Categories tab. (Default 3D View). 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and clear Zoning Setback. 44 On the View toolbar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. select it. double-click 02 Entry Level. click (Default 3D View). 43 Click OK. NOTE If Site is not selected.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created.

click another wall. click one wall. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. select Linear . Modifying Annotations | 825 . 5 Under Text. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. select Feet and fractional inches. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Dimension. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. click Duplicate. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. You have created a new dimension style. under Floor Plans. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. To place a dimension. 9 In the Type Selector.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser.rvt. click the default value. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 7 Click OK twice. (Undo). 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. and place a dimension on the floor plan.Imperial. double-click 02 Entry Level. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. and then click outside the second wall. 10 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress.Imperial and click OK. For Units. click Modify. 4 Enter the name Linear . for Units Format.

22 Under Loaded Tags. 24 While pressing CTRL. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. click M_Window Tag . Then press Delete. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . click Training Files. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. 19 Click Load. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the 3 window tags.Number. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. click (Element Properties). click Tag All Not Tagged. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Leave M_Window Tag . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value.Number. In the steps that follow. 16 Click Cancel. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 21 In the Tags dialog. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. click Tag ➤ By Category. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar.Number as the assigned tag. click the bottom window. 18 In the Tags dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 On the west wall. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . under Category. 23 Click OK. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. In the preview image. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. clear Leader. scroll down to Windows.Number is now the assigned tag.rfa.14 On the Options Bar. notice that the label displays 1i. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.

In the second section. For Unit symbol. 2 In the Project Units dialog. dimensions use these project settings. 32 On the View toolbar. select 0 decimal places. you modify the temporary dimension settings. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. (Default 3D View). for Area. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. for Rounding. Unless overridden. click the default value.Under Category. Click OK. and click OK. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. select Openings. 8 Under Walls. dimension values display using this setting. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. and click OK. 30 Under Leader. you modify the detail level assignments.Number. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. notice Window Tags appears twice. 9 Under Doors and Windows. the other displays the instance value. 6 Click OK. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. select Faces.Temporary Dimensions. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. and Detail Level Options | 827 .Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements. In the final section. Specifying Units of Measurement. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. select meters squared. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. Unless overridden. select To the nearest 100. Specifying Units of Measurement. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Modify. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. 31 On the Design Bar. In the first section. M_Window Tag . 4 In the Project Units dialog. for Length. verify that Create is clear. and click OK. click the default value. and Detail Level Options on page 827. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. 3 In the Format dialog.

click .rvt. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 12 Click OK. expand Views (all). and expand 3D Views. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. You do not select a view scale to move it. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls.In this project. expand Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. In this table. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click Training Files. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium.

Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. notice that views are grouped by phase.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand each view type. 6 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 Select Phase. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. expand Sheets (all).Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 10 In the Project Browser. and notice that each is grouped by discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . select Discipline. and click Apply. 5 On the Views tab. In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. and click OK. select Type/Discipline.

16 Click the Views tab. and click OK. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. click the Folders tab. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each sheet set. and click New. under Sheets.

navigate to your preferred directory. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. If you want to save this file. Creating an Office Template | 831 . and open Metric\Templates. Whenever you create a new project or template. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. and click Open. In this lesson. levels. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. the same rules apply. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. dimensions styles. 21 In the Project Browser. and Discipline. You can also save these settings in a template file.20 In the Browser Organization dialog.rte template. click Browse. you create an office template. Creating an Office Template on page 831. You can choose from several templates. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. enter a unique file name. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. View Type (Family and Type). you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. and click OK. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and view names. When you create new projects. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. In the lesson that follows. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click OK. and expand both Architectural and Structural. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. when you create a new project. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. For example. 2 Under Template file. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Proceed to the next lesson. you select the starting point for your office template. expand Complete. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. under Views. When you create a new template based on an existing template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. expand 3D Views. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. In that case. click Training Files.

navigate throughout the various views and schedules. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. in the drawing area. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. drag a zoom region around the level heads. 14 Click Open. close them. If you want to use a template other than the default. 6 Click OK. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered.5 In the New Project dialog. for Create new. For example. you modify the project settings for your new template. 9 In the Project Browser. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. If you have additional projects open. 7 In the Project Browser. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. weights. 12 Under Template File. select Project. and double-click North. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click Browse. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. 13 Select the default template. and click OK. When you create the material. you can select it now. select Project template. In this exercise. 15 Under Create new.

or modify existing patterns. or refer to the online help. In the Object Styles dialog. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. texture. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. line colors. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. and materials for model objects. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. create and modify them as needed. specific modifications are not dictated. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. rotate. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category.During this exercise. 13 If necessary. When you create or modify a material. Observe the materials that are already defined. see the previous lesson. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. and similar attributes. and move model patterns. 9 Click OK when finished. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. you can set line weights. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. You do this by defining the render appearance. If you change render appearance properties. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. create new subcategories. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. You can align. 2 Scroll down the materials list. see a preview of the rendered material. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. For more details on modifying these settings. For more information. and change render appearance properties. TIP For more information about creating new materials. transparency. the changes are saved as part of the project template. including color. line patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. or refer to the online help. Modifying System Settings on page 803. annotation objects. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. and imported objects. 4 Click Replace. Modifying Project Settings | 833 .

Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 20 Click OK. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. name the style. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. You can add and delete view scales. 29 Click OK. click Duplicate. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 For existing line categories. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. and click Edit. 32 To modify a line pattern. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. select it from this list. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. and dimensions. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. select it. line color. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 19 If necessary. or line pattern as needed. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. create new line subcategories. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 34 Click OK. and create new subcategories as needed. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. tags. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed.15 Modify categories. To see the details of a particular style. and specify the properties. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. such as section lines and dimension lines. modify the line weight. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes.

In the Tags dialog. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. angular. and radial dimensions are modified separately. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 57 Specify the Slope option. click Load. Volume. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. name the style. click Duplicate. select it from this list. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. To see the details of a particular style. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. Linear. and Angle settings. For example. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 58 Click OK. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 53 For Length.40 Click OK. 50 To load new annotation tags. and choose a decimal symbol. 46 Click OK. 55 Click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. TIP In the drawing area. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. click Format. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 60 Under Walls. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 62 Click OK. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. and specify the properties. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. and click OK.

click the arrows between columns. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. When you create a new view. and move view scales as needed. or Fine. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. or edit existing organization types. See Setting up If necessary. 68 Delete. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. In such a case. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. In a typical project. Medium. 71 Delete. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. However. You can find additional information in Help. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. To move the view scales. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. click the Views tab. The detail level is based on view scale. rename. For example. create new browser organization types. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. 64 Review the table. create new browser organization types. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. 73 Click OK. 72 If necessary. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 69 If necessary. 65 Click OK. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Use the table below as a checklist. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. and make modifications in each area as necessary. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. rename. or edit existing organization types. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Links to associated tutorials are provided. 70 Click the Sheets tab. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Using the arrows between the columns. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Each command is available on the Settings menu.

there are some important thoughts to consider. You can load any family or group into a template. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. or electrical fixtures. you do both. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can set the default contour line interval. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you can set up the phases. If this selection is satisfactory. click Door. and electrical fixtures. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. do so before starting this exercise. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. phase filters. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. For example. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. if you load every available window type. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you may want to delete. and the poche depth. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. title blocks. In addition. 2 In the Type Selector. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. Although this is possible. notice the list of doors already loaded. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . you can move onto the next component type. furniture. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. or add to this selection. the section cut material. Depending on the intended use of this template. If necessary. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Although the options are endless. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. For example. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. modify. you could load detail components.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. In the steps that follow. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. However. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. or use the Project Browser.

Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. create. expand Families. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Click Duplicate. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab.3 To modify. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. and click OK. or modify a door. and click OK. click Edit/New. and click OK. click Edit/New. click Bar. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. In the Element Properties dialog. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. or load a new door type. click Load. Make modifications. In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that each family category is listed. create. Modify type properties. Select it. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. and click Open. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Enter a name. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog.

Discipline. (Element Properties). (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. To do so. In addition.) 10 Expand the title block. click 12 Click Preview. you created new projects using different templates. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . right-click the component. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. create. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. To load a title block. In addition. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. and click Delete. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. In this exercise. View Range. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Load. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. load. and select the title block type. This title block is currently part of the template. 11 On the Options Bar. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. 13 Click OK. you create the views required for your template. Detail Level.

and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. under Floor Plans. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. Every time a new plan view is created. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 2 Under Names. the view is not linked to the template in any way. click Apply. click Apply. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. under Elevations. double-click Level 2. select Architectural Plan. 15 In the Project Browser. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you can apply a view template to any view. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. open the view from the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. select Site Plan. you will first modify view templates. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans.settings of categories and subcategories. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. and then click OK. and click OK. In this exercise. 18 If you modified any other view templates. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 6 Click OK. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. At any time. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. After applying the template. and apply the appropriate template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. double-click Site. and double-click Level 1. In addition. double-click South. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. 4 If necessary. 12 In the Project Browser. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 11 Click Apply. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template.

review the floor plans. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. in the Project Browser. 23 To add more levels to the template. review the existing floor plans. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 27 Create additional levels as needed. or delete this view. If prompted. and click Properties. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. a face. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . If you want to modify view properties. ceiling plans.Notice the level names. under 3D Views. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and. enter a view name. duplicate. right-click the ViewCube. duplicate. right-click {3D}. select Make Plan View. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. and select the desired direction. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. 21 In the Project Browser. or delete them as needed. click Level. and click Rename. and elevations. Black level heads have no associated views. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. By default. Blue level heads have associated plan views. and click Save View. 31 Rename the 3D View. use the ViewCube. under Floor Plans. right-click the view name. notice that you have the option to rename. click Orient to a Direction. click Schedule/Quantities. in the shortcut menu. If it does not display. Rename. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. right-click the ViewCube. and select the desired view. right-click the ViewCube. click Orient to View. right-click Level 1. 30 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. To orient the 3D view to another view. To orient the 3D view to a direction. on the View toolbar. click 29 In the Project Browser. or an edge of the ViewCube. 20 In the Project Browser. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. expand 3D Views.

If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. and click OK. 40 To add views to the sheet. After the sheet is created. and click OK. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files.txt for MicroStation). expand Sheets (all). in the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. click Sheet. modify settings as needed. On the Appearance tab. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. select the title block and delete it. On the Filter tab. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. You can still add views to the sheet. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. modify settings as needed. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. assign filters. and click Rename. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 37 Click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. click Add View. 42 Create new sheets as needed. You are prompted to select a title block. select the default title block. modify settings as needed. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. To do so. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. To later add a title block to a sheet. Select a view.txt for AutoCAD.You can add schedules to a template. Right-click the sheet name. and modify their properties accordingly. select and order required fields. On the Formatting tab. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. or exportlayersdgn. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. select one. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the category type. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. and click OK. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block.

These settings are retained within the project template. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. for example. Using shared parameters. click Save As. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. and so on. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. For example. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. You can save these mappings to a text file. and click Save. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. and click Save. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. and they become the set mappings for the project. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 2 For each category. doors. 9 Click Save As. and so on. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. They cannot be shared with other projects. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. name the file. 5 For each category. therefore. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. When you create a multi-category schedule. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. and click Save. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. select Save As. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. When scheduling. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. name the file. project parameters.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. When you import a DWG or DXF file. name the file. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. 8 In the dialog. windows. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category.

Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 22 Click OK. 26 Click OK. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. select a parameter discipline type. and choose a shared parameter. 9 Name the parameter. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. and click OK. you can create a list of parameters. select Project parameter. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. select a parameter value type. 10 Click OK. and select Shared Parameter. 24 To add a shared project parameter. project parameters. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. click New. add required parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 8 Under Parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. for Name. click New. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. and specify its discipline and type. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. because each office has a unique set of needs. click Add. 14 Click Add. 19 Under Group parameter under. 16 Under Parameter Data. under Groups. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. enter a parameter name. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. If this template will be used by multiple team members.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. you may want to save the file to a network location. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 2 Click Create. 5 Enter the group name. 25 Click Select. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 3 Name and save the file. 23 Add project parameters as needed. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. For each parameter group. select a group to add parameters to. 11 For each parameter group. 21 Under Categories. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 17 Under Discipline. If a file already exists.

Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. and make it your default template file. 28 Click OK. select the tag. For each printer. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Click OK.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 4 Modify the printer settings. 6 In the New dialog. By creating named settings within the template. For information on creating multi-category tags. and click OK. 34 For Category. or refer to the online help. you can load them into the template. and the percent of actual size. click Schedule/Quantities. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 37 When you have completed the schedule. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. click Setup. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 35 For Name. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. click OK. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. and print. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. for Name. 5 Click Save As. In this exercise. 2 Under Printer. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create named print settings. you can set options such as sheet sizes. paper placement. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. The tag is now part of the template. you need only select a setting. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . make minor modifications if necessary. save the file as a template. select Multi-Category. 3 Under Settings. By going first to the Print command. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and click Open. enter a name for the schedule. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 32 Navigate to the directory.

If you have a project. 9 In the Print dialog. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. modify the printer settings. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. In addition. Your template is complete. 23 For Default template file. and create new settings for this printer. 19 Select the template. TIP There are other ways you can create a template.rte). 10 Repeat these steps as needed. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . If you need to share this file with others. click Setup. You can also set this template as your default template. 25 Click OK. click Save as. Create additional settings as needed. and saved them to a template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 20 Click OK. 15 Name the template. select Template Files (*. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. In addition. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and click Open. 24 Navigate to the template location. The only remaining task is to save it. you modified settings. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and click Open. 14 Under Save as type. 22 Click the File Locations tab. and click Save. and click OK. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. click Browse. By investing the time to individualize your template. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. In this lesson. This can provide a good starting point for a template. select a different printer. 11 Click Close when finished. 18 Click Browse. select it.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. save it in a network location. enter a new name for the printer. loaded components. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save.